Machine Parameters CC 220

Typ1 osa / CC 220
Machine Parameters
106
Version
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Machine Parameters
1070 073 309-106 (96.06) GB
Z4 GA and D4 NA (Type1 osa)
Z25 FO and D25 NJ (CC 220)
Reg. Nr. 16149-03
E 1996
by Robert Bosch GmbH,

All rights reserved, including applications for protective rights.
Reproduction or handing over to third parties are subject to our written permission.
Discretionary charge 20.– DM

Type1 osa / CC 220
Contents
Machine parameters
Table of contents
Page
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword − 1
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety − 1

Software version
User information
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3. Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.1 Running the machine parameters program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4.2 Editing (modifying) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2.1 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2.2 Cursor functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2.3 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2.4 Delete / Undelete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
4.2.5 Additional functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.3 Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.4 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.5 Load (CC 220 / Type1 osa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.6 Output (CC 220 / Type1 osa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4.7 Manage EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.8 Controlling the machine parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5. Machine parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.1 Machine parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
P 100 Axis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
P 500 Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
P 1000 Axis dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
P 1500 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
P 2000 Auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
P 2500 Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
P 3000 Powerup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
P 3500 Colour settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
P 3600 Greyscale settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
P 4000 CPL parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
P 4500 Zero shifts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
P 5000 Suppression table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
P 5500 Device selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
P 6000 PLC parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Contents − 1
Type1 osa / CC 220
Contents
Machine parameters
Page
P 6100 Electronic limit switches normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
P 6200 Electronic limit switches fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
P 6300 Laser applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
P 6400 Tangential tool control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
P 6500 Centre parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
P 6600 Compensation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
P 6800 Contourdependent feedrate override (Look ahead) . . . . . . . . . 112
P 7000 Spindle parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
P 7100 Parameters for 2nd spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
P 7200 Exact tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
P 7500 Turning machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
P 7600 Caxis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
P 8500 DNC interface with simple protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
P 8600 DNC interface with LSV2 protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
P 8700 FMS communications interface with BAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
P 9000 Address selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
P 9500 Axis processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
P 9900 System parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6. Index of all parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Contents − 2
Type1 osa / CC 220
Foreword
Machine parameters
Foreword
Software version
This manual describes software version Z25 GO" for control unit CC 220 M and
D25 NJ" for control unit CC 220T as well as software version Z4 GA" for control
unit Type1 osa M and D4 NA" for control unit Type1 osa T.
IMPORTANT
The group operating mode DIAGNOSIS contains instructions for the current
control unit software version which may be accessed via the softkey DIAGNOSTIC
CONTROL or SOFTWARE VERSION.
Proper use
As the title suggests, this manual contains information required for normal
operation of the control unit. For reasons of clarity, however, not every detail of
every possible combination of parameters can be included. Similarly, as the
control unit is usually only part of a larger installation or system, not every
conceivable aspect of integration or operation is covered.
Your Bosch service branch or customer advisory service will be pleased to help you
if you require more detailed information or if problems with the control unit should
arise which are not sufficiently dealt with in this manual. The addresses may be
found on the back cover of this manual.
This manual is intended for technically qualified personnel. The machine

parameter program (MPP) enables significant alterations to be made to the
interaction between the CNC, machine and drives, including the performance of
the CNC itself!
CAUTION !
Only suitably trained specialist personnel may start and operate the MPP and
!
make changes to machine parameters. Such personnel should be capable
of recognising the dangers involved in changing parameters and which can
generally arise from mechanical, electrical or electronic equipment.
Operation of the MPP by inadequately trained or untrained personnel can result in
serious damage to the machine and drives, loss of software or even injury to per
sons. Bosch accepts no liability for damage resulting from incorrectly pro
grammed, calculated or optimised machine parameters, or from unobserved data
limits.
Please note that we offer a comprehensive training program. An overview of

courses may be found on the inside front cover of this manual. Our training centre
will be pleased to provide you with further information. The address may be found
on the back cover of this manual.
Foreword −1
Type1 osa / CC 220
Foreword
Machine parameters
Foreword −2
Type1 osa / CC 220
Safety instructions
Machine parameters
Safety instructions
The Type1 osa and CC220 series control units were developed, manufactured
and tested in accordance with the basic safety stipulations of the EC Machine
Guideline.
You should nevertheless be wary of residual risks!
You should therefore read this manual before configuring or commissioning this
type1 osa or the CC 220, or working with the machine parameters for the first time.
Pictographs and symbol explanations
The following warnings and instructions can be attached to hardware modules to

draw attention to certain points:
’ Danger of electrocution!
’ Electrostatically sensitive devices!
’ Remove plug before opening!
’ Bolts only for PE conductor connection!
’ Only for cable screen connection!
Safety − 1
Type1 osa / CC 220
Safety instructions
Machine parameters
Hierarchical warning instructions are used in this manual. The warning

instructions are printed in bold, being designated and clearly indicated by a
warning symbol at the side of the page.
The warning instructions are classed hierarchically in the following order:
1. WARNING
2. CAUTION
3. NOTE
WARNING!
The term WARNING is used to warn of immediate danger.
!
This could lead to a fatality or serious injury (personal injuries).
CAUTION
The term CAUTION is used to warn of a potentially dangerous situation.
!
This could lead to a fatality or serious or light personal injuries or damage to
equipment or to the environment.
NOTE
The term NOTE is used to refer to a recommended course of action.
Damage to equipment, e.g. to the machine or the workpiece, or loss of data, may
result if instructions are not observed.
The symbol IMPORTANT is used in addition to the hierarchy of warning

instructions described above:
IMPORTANT
This designates a passage from the text which contains explanatory information or
tips.
Safety − 2
Type1 osa / CC 220
Safety instructions
Machine parameters
Proper use
The Type1 osa or CC 220 is used for
‘ controlling feed drives, spindles and auxiliary axes in a machine tool in

order to guide a machining tool along a programmed path to machine a
work piece (CNC).
In addition, a PLC with corresponding I/O components is required to
control completely the machining process while in communication with
the actual CNC as well as monitoring safetyrelated aspects of the
process.
‘ programming the contour and machining technology (feedrate, spindle
speed, tool change) of a workpiece.
Any other use is against regulations!
CAUTION!
− Improper use may have consequences such as personal injury to the user or a
!
third party, material damages to the equipment and to the workpiece being
machined, or damage to the environment.
You should therefore use our products only as here instructed!
− Movements of tools and axes may lead to serious or fatal injuries!
Every operator, production line builder or machine manufacturer is obliged to
connect input signals of the Type1 osa or the CC 220 which can trigger a
machining start (e.g. NCSTART) as well as the contact READY(2) in
compliance with the applicable safety requirements.
In addition to this, the emergency stop circuit must be designed in accordance
with the applicable safety requirements and guidelines.
Equipment such as ‘protective covers
‘protective screens
‘light cabinets etc.
can reduce the risk of accident considerably.
Safety − 3
Type1 osa / CC 220
Safety instructions
Machine parameters
Qualified personnel
This manual is intended for specially trained technicians and engineers who
possess expert knowledge of CNC technology. Thorough knowledge of the
hardware and software components involved in the system under control is
essential.
Qualified personnel are
− project planning personnel who are familiar with the safety guidelines for
electrical and automation technology
− commissioning personnel who are authorized to earth, mark, and put into
operation electric circuits and devices/systems in accordance with recognized
safety standards.
CAUTION!
Only suitably qualified personnel may make changes to machine parameters!
!
Such personnel should be capable of recognizing the dangers involved in
changing parameters and which can generally arise from mechanical, electrical or
electronic equipment.
Changes made to machine parameters by inadequately or untrained personnel
can result in serious damage to machines and drives, loss of software or even
injury to persons!
Bosch accepts no liability for damages resulting from incorrectly programmed,
calculated or optimised configuration parameters, or from unobserved data limits!
Please note our comprehensive training programme. An overview of courses may

be found on the inside front cover of this manual. Our training centre will be
pleased to provide you with further information (tel: 06062 / 78258).
Retrofittings and changes by the operator

Our units have been designed and constructed to offer the utmost safety.
WARNING!
− Retrofitting the devices or making changes to them may compromise their
!
safety!
This could lead to a fatality, serious or slight injury (personal injuries), or
damage to equipment or to the environment.
You should therefore contact us first before carrying out any retrofittings or
changes to the equipment which involve parts made by manufacturers other
than Bosch. We are in a position to advice you as to whether such parts are
compatible with our products.
Safety − 4
Type1 osa / CC 220
Safety instructions
Machine parameters
Maintenance, repairs
WARNING!
− Danger of electrocution!
!
Unless otherwise stated, maintenance work must always be carried out when
the unit is switched off! The unit should be protected against unauthorised or
accidental restart.
If it is necessary to carry out measuring or testing operations on an active unit,
the existing safety and accident prevention regulations must be observed. A
suitable electric tool must be used in any case!
− Risk of fatal injury due to inadequate EMERGENCY OFF devices!
Emergency stop devices must remain operative and accessible in all unit
modes. Ensure when unlocking the EMERGENCY OFF device that the unit is
not restarted without being regulated!
Feed and spindle motors have very powerful mechanical forces at their
disposal and can accelerate very quickly due to the high dynamic.
You should therefore never be standing in the danger area of the machine while
it is running!
Do not ever − not even briefly − deactivate the safetyrelevant functions of
the unit!
Report any faults in the unit to your servicing and repairs department
immediately!
− Danger of explosion from batteries!
Batteries should not be forcibly opened, recharged, soldered or thrown into
fire!
Replace used batteries with new ones!
CAUTION!
− Repairs or maintenance of control unit components may only be carried out by
!
the Bosch Service Department or by maintenance centres authorised by
Bosch.
− Only replacement parts and spares authorised by Bosch may be used!
− Used or rechargeable batteries must be treated as special waste!
Safety − 5
Type1 osa / CC 220
Safety instructions
Machine parameters
Safetyconscious work
WARNING!
!
Feed and spindle motors have very powerful mechanical forces at their
disposal and can accelerate very quickly due to the high dynamic.
You should therefore never be standing in the danger area of the machine while
it is running!
Do not ever − not even briefly − deactivate the safetyrelevant functions of
the unit!
Report any faults in the unit to your servicing and repairs department
immediately!
− The wrong choice of clothing may have fatal consequences!
Where machines with moving parts are involved, careless handling may lead to
clothes or long hair being caught, pulling the user into the machine!
You shoud therefore: ‘ wear a hair net
‘ wear a protective suit
‘ remove protective gloves before
coming close to moving parts
‘ remove jewellery and bracelets
− Remember that chippings may be cast out during operation of the machine
unit! They can cause eye injuries and burns.
You should therefore: ‘ wear protective goggles
‘ wear a protective suit
− There is also a danger of injury from sharp edges on workpieces and tools
during transport!
You should therefore: ‘ wear protective gloves
Safety − 6
Type1 osa / CC 220
General
Machine parameters
1. General
The machine parameters program (MPP) is used to adapt the CNC control to the
machine tool. The modifiable data is divided into three groups:
‘ Application data
Data for activating the range of options ordered from the machine tool
manufacturer (MTM), e.g. 5th axis, 128 kB program memory, thread milling.
‘ Machine data
Data for adapting the CNC functions to the specific peculiarities of the
machine (e.g. axis speeds).
‘ System data
Data for adapting the CNC operating system to special requirements
(e.g. interpolation time).
CAUTION!
The drives must always be correctly adjusted before optimising/setting the
machine parameters.
The MTM may only modify the actual machine data independently.
! Changes to the system data and/or application data should only be made on the
instructions of the Bosch Service department.
2. Applications
The machine parameters program (diagnostic program 4) is permanently present
in the operating system of the CNC (EPROM) and facilitates the display, changing,
loading and outputting of all machine parameter data. This supports the following
applications:
‘ Activating the range of options ordered by the client (from the machine tool
manufacturer).
‘ Documenting or archiving the machine parameters for a particular system
(MTM).
‘ Backing up the machine parameters via external data carriers and/
or EEPROM, so that they can be reloaded if any of the data is lost
(end client).
3. Function
The machine parameters program is permanently present in the operating system
(EPROM) and includes the following functions:
‘ Displaying the machine parameter data
‘ Changing the machine parameter data

‘ Loading the machine parameter data from a storage medium
‘ Outputting the machine parameter data to a storage medium

‘ Saving data to EEPROM by means of diagnostic program D9 EEPROM
MANAGEMENT".
−1−
Type1 osa / CC 220
General
Machine parameters
−2−
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4. Operation
4.1 Running the machine parameters program

The machine parameters program (MPP) may only be accessed in DIAGNOSTIC
operating mode.
This operating mode is selected by pressing
The following display appears onscreen:
NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

PROGRAM ACT WAITING 24. 3 15:25
ERROR CONDITION ON STATUS

G 1 G 71 NO REF. POINTS
G 90 G 66 G 140 DRIVES ON
G 94 G 40 G 7 FEED STOP
G 17 G 8 G 27
G 15 G 29 G 79
G 80 G 130 G 53
G 153 G 253 G 67
G 39 G 62 G 97
G 65 G 68 G 99
G 146 G 115 G 167
G 994
LAST PROGRAMMED
F 100.0 S 0 T 1016 M 30 B 0
DIAGNOSTIC DIAGNOSTIC RESET SERVICE

CONTROL MACHINE FUNCTION FUNCTION
SERVICE
FUNCTION
By actuating the softkey and − if requested to do so by the
system − inputting a code number, an overview of all currently resident diagnostic
programs (D) may be obtained.

NUMBER NAME OF PROGRAM LENGTH ACCESS

D 1 LOGBOOK MONITOR E
D 2 RELOAD OPERATING PROGRAM E
D 3 CLEAR ALL MEMORY E
D 4 MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAM E
D 5 INTERNAL REF. POINT OFFSET E
D 6 SERIAL IF DATA E
D 7 COMMUNICATION STORAGE DISPLAY E
D 9 MANAGE EEPROM E
D 21 LOGIC ANALYSER E
D 22 AXIS OSCIL. E
D 23 CONTOUR DISPLAY E
D 24 AXIS OPTIMISATION E
MEMORY USED BY DIAGNOSTIC 4156 OTHERS: 72042

MEMORY AVAILABLE : 185946
SERVICE FUNCTION
LOAD OUTPUT START DELETE
−3 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
By pressing the softkey
START
and inputting program number 4, the machine parameter
program may be started.


L 870 USER<−HEAP<−BLOCK.................... 4140
L 1 NC LINK TABLE 152 RWED
L 444 MACHINE PARAMETERS 24.03 23319 RWED
MEMORY USED BY SYSTEM 28219 OTHERS: 34690

MACHINE PARAMETERS PROGRAM
EDIT LOAD TRANSFER OUTPUT MANAGE
IMPORTANT
The files NC LINK TABLE" and USER<−HEAP<−BLOCK" have no connection
with the MPP. L444 only appears if the MP has already been edited or output at least
once.
If on selecting DIAGNOSTIC operating mode, the softkey line
DIAGNOSTIC DIAGNOSTIC RESET SERVICE

CONTROL MACHINE FUNCTION FUNCTION MPP
is displayed, including the MPP" softkey, pressing the softkey
MPP
is all that is needed to reach the Machine parameters program"
operating level.
−4 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.2 Editing (modifying)
IMPORTANT
Only data which is NOT enclosed in square brackets may be edited!
If the parameters are to be edited for the first time, the following display will normally
appear (link tables are only present if programs were linked together beforehand):


L 870 USER<−HEAP<−BLOCK.................... 4140

EDIT
By pressing the softkey the following operating level is reached


L 870 USER<−HEAP<−BLOCK.................... 4140

WITH TEXT WITHOUT TEXT
By using the soft keys, the L444 machine parameters file can be generated with or
without text. This soft key bar only appears if L444 does not yet exist or has been
deleted.
−5 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
After pressing one of the two soft keys, a message appears onscreen indicating
that the file is being generated. The control generates L444 from the default or
application values stored in system memory.


L 870 USER<−HEAP<−BLOCK.................... 4140

PLEASE WAIT: FILE BEING GENERATED, SET 3500
Once file L444 has been generated, the following display appears:

OPTIONS
B O S C H CC220 BASIC FUNCTIONS
MEMORY 224 (+32) K−BYTE
CLIENT EPROM 2048 K−BYTE
THREAD CUTTING INCL. G95
THREAD MILLING
FEED FORWARD CONTROL
ACCELERATION PROGRAMMING
LOOP FACTOR PROGRAMMING
CORNER DECELERATION/ACCELERATION
16 STANDARD LIMIT SWITCHES IF
4 FAST LIMIT SWITCHES IF
SOFTWARE LIMIT SWITCHES SUPPRESSED
3 ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
PROGRAMMABLE SPINDLE ORIENTATION
EXTERNAL PROGRAM SELECTION
LEAD SCREW ERROR COMPENSATION
CPL WITH GRAPHIC COMMANDS
DNC INTERFACE WITH SIMPLE PROTOCOL
EDIT L 444
YES NO ADGJM BEHKN CFILO

FUNCTIONS
$ LF PSVY QTWY RUX
All active options are listed before an overview of the machine parameter sets is
displayed.
−6 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
Example of a machine parameters file (L444) with text

MACHINE PARAMETER SETS

P 100 AXIS PARAMETERS
P 500 SPEEDS
P 1000 AXIS DYNAMICS
P 1500 POSITIONS
P 2000 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
P 2500 POTENTIOMETERS
P 3000 POWER−UP STATE
P 3500 COLOUR SETTINGS
P 4000 CPL−PARAMETERS
P 4500 ZERO SHIFTS
P 5000 SUPPRESSION TABLE
P 5500 DEVICE SELECTION
P 6000 PLC PARAMETERS
P 6100 E L E C T R: L I M I T S W I T C H N O R M A L
P 6200 E L E C T R: L I M I T S W I T C H F A S T
P 6500 TOOL COMPENSATIONS
EDIT L 444

FUNCTIONS
$ LF PSVY QTWY RUX
4.2.1 Input
If there is already a keyboard available (e.g. with Type1 osa keyboard), then
characters are selected via the keyboard (SK:Keyboard available is in reverse
video; see chapter 4.2.5), and the highest level of the editor appears as follows:
EDIT L 444
POSITION
DELETE SEARCH CURSOR FUNCTIONS
The softkey bar
EDIT L 444
$ LF PSVY QTWZ RUX FUNCTIONS
identifies the highest editor level if no keyboard is available or the softkey

Keyboard available is not in reverse video (see chapter 4.2.5).
At this level, it is possible to input any of the alphabetic characters displayed.
It is possible to insert the softkey character displayed in reverse video into the MP
file by pressing the RETURN key.
By pressing a soft key repeatedly, the characters which can be selected from this
menu are displayed in reverse video one after the other.
The cursor indicates the point at which any characters entered are inserted into the
file.
−7 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.2.2 Cursor functions

The cursor can be moved anywhere on the screen using the cursor keys. In
addition, the cursor can be placed in certain positions, which must be specified.
Position cursor
Starting at operating level
EDIT L 444
by selecting
POSITION
FUNCTIONS CURSOR
and then selecting the operating level is
reached.
EDIT L 444
* DOWN
RETURN BLOCK WORD 8 LINES UP
BLOCK
By selecting the cursor always jumps to the start of a new line.
WORD
By selecting the cursor jumps to the first character of the next
word.
8 LINES
By selecting the cursor always jumps down 8 lines.
By selecting the down/up" softkey, the cursor functions become effective towards
the end/start of the file.
RETURN
Press to return to operating level
EDIT L 444
Scroll
The screen display can be scrolled up and down line by line using the cursor keys.
−8 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.2.3 Search
It is possible to carry out searches for specific individual terms in the editor.
EDIT L 444
FUNCTIONS
The softkey should be pressed at the highest operating level of
the editor.
This initiates the transition to the next operating level.
EDIT L 444
POSITION
SEARCH
By selecting the following display is reached:
EDIT L 444
DEFINE SEARCH FOR *DOWN
RETURN STRING STRING END UP
Direction of search
The direction of search must be determined before specifying the string to be
searched for.
* DOWN
UP
This can be done by pressing .
The asterisk indicates the active direction.
The softkey END is displayed if search direction DOWN is selected, and allows a
jump directly to the end of MP file L444.
The softkey START appears if search direction UP is active, and allows a jump
directly to the beginning of MP file L444.
The softkey RETURN allows a jump back into the highest level of the editor.
Searching for character strings

DEFINE
STRING
By pressing the following softkey bar appears:
EDIT L 444 SEARCH FOR : P3500

$ LF PSVY QTWZ RUX READY
The character string to be searched for may now be entered. Every single letter
must be confirmed by pressing <ENTER>. Numbers are entered directly via the
appropriate keys and cannot/need not be confirmed by pressing <ENTER>.
READY
The function initiates the search procedure. The cursor jumps to
the searchedfor location.
−9 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters

− 62
P3009 FEED COMPENSATION ON/OFF (G64/G65)
− 65
P3010 OUTSIDE CORNERS AS A RADIUS OR INTERSECTION (G68(69)
− 68
P3011 TOOL TABLE COMPENSATION ON/OFF (G145/G46)
− 146
P3012 FEED FORWARD CONTROL (G114/G115)
− 115
P3013 EXTERNAL ZERO SHIFT ON/OFF (G160/G167)
− 167
P3500 C O L O U R S E T T I N G S
P3501 COLOUR "AREA" (FOREGROUND AND BACKGROUND)
FOREGROUND BLACK BACKGROUND LIGHT BLUE
P3502 COLOUR "SOFTKEY"
FOUND
EDIT L 444
DEFINE SEARCH *DOWN

RETURN END
STRING STRING UP
SEARCH
STRING
By pressing the search for the specified search word is
continued in the remaining program text, starting at the current location. The
message STRING NOT FOUND" appears if the soughtfor character string is not
found in the active search direction.
The softkey RETURN can be pressed to jump back to the highest operating level.
EDIT L 444
− 10 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.2.4 Delete / Undelete
Starting at operating level
EDIT L 444
POSITION
DELETE
by pressing the softkey the following operating level is reached:
EDIT L 444
DELETE DELETE DELETE *DELETE
RETURN BLOCK WORD CHARACTER UNDELETE
DELETE
BLOCK
Pressing the softkey deletes the line in the machine parameters
file at the beginning of which the cursor is positioned. If the cursor is positioned in
the middle of a line, the remainder of the line (after the cursor) is deleted.
DELETE
CHARACTER
Pressing the softkey deletes the character on which the cursor is
positioned.
DELETE
WORD
Placing the cursor on the first letter of a word and pressing de
letes the word. The cursor must be positioned on a word.
After deleting a line or character, the procedure can be reversed and the text can be
restored to its original condition (undeleting).
DELETE
*UNDELETE
This is achieved by pressing the softkey. The softkey bar
changes to
EDIT L 444
UNDELETE UNDELETE UNDELETE DELETE
RETURN BLOCK WORD CHARACTER *UNDELETE
The last item to be deleted (line, word, character) is always stored in an

intermediate buffer.
UNDELETE UNDELETE UNDELETE

BLOCK CHARACTER WORD
By pressing or or
the contents of this buffer memory (i.e. the last item to be deleted) is inserted back
into the MP file. The cursor indicates the position at which the text will be reinserted.
− 11 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.2.5 Additional functions

Starting at highest editor operating level
EDIT L 444
FUNCTIONS
and pressing the softkey twice, the following level is reached
EDIT L 444
RETURN ABORT FUNCTIONS
IMPORTANT
If the MP file (L444) is not being edited, an additional softkey is displayed entitled
INSERT FILE. This has no significance for the MP file.
RETURN
Press to return to the original operating level.
ABORT
Press to leave the editor. The system ignores all data edited up to
this moment and jumps to the level:
FUNCTIONS
Select again to switch to operating level:
DELETE *M30
TO EOL INSERT SECTION CALCULATE FUNCTIONS
DELETE
TO EOL
The softkey deletes all characters from the current cursor
position until the end of the line.
(The deleted sequence may be restored via UNDELETE BLOCK").
*M30
INSERT
Ensure that the softkey is in reverse video. This is the only way to
guarantee that an M30 is automatically positioned at the end of the MP file after
editing. Without the M30 the MP file cannot be transferred to the operating system.
CALCULATE
The function allows the calculation of a numerical value to be
entered, by using arithmetical operations.
The dot before dash" rule applies. Intermediate results are not stored.
The result appears at the current cursor position if ENTER" is pressed.
− 12 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
SECTION
The function makes it possible to select, copy, insert and shift
complete areas of the text to be edited.
FUNCTIONS
Press to reach the next softkey level.
CHANGE KEYBOARD
WORD AVAILABLE RETURN
KEYBOARD
If the AVAILABLE function is in reverse video, then text and numbers are
entered using the keyboard (e.g. Type1 osa keyboard). Text and numbers can also
be entered using the five softkeys if this softkey is not displayed in reverse video.
− 13 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.3 Transfer
By jumping back through the levels from the editor the following operating level
may be reached
The edited machine parameters are only transferred to the operating system in the
TRANSFER
form of an internal data record by pressing the softkey. The
operating system is then restarted. Once the machine parameters have been
transfered, file L444 can be deleted and the appropriate memory area made
reavailable via CONTROL REST". L444 is only required in order to edit or output
the machine parameters.
The machine parameters are not automatically transferred into the EEPROMs on
the memory card. This can only be done by using diagnostic program 9 EEPROM
MANAGEMENT" (see 4.7).
NOTE
The CNC power supply must not be interrupted during transfer of machine
parameters!
Error detection
If an error is detected during the transfer process, the faulty line in the MP file is
displayed onscreen under the message INCORRECT MACHINE PARAMETER",
and the error displayed in reverse video. In addition, an error message appears in
the command line.
The transfer is aborted.
Possible error messages

− Machine parameters are missing:
File L 444, which is to be transferred or deleted, does not exist.
− Invalid application data:
May have been edited by mistake.
Remedy: delete L 444 and read in again/regenerate.
− Memory full:
Not enough memory for L 444.
Remedy: control reset or delete other files + control reset.
− Too many or invalid characters:
A parameter contains more than ten characters or an invalid character.
− Invalid block number:
The previous parameter block may be missing in L 444.
− Invalid value:
A parameter value does not fall within the valid range of values.
− Invalid relationship with block XXX:
Inpermissible parameter combinations.
− Interruption of transfer:
During the transfer, the file is read through" a total of three times. During the
first two passes, the process can be interrupted by changing operating mode
or moving back to another level.
If no error is detected, the operating system is restarted.
− 14 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.4 Delete
MANAGE DELETE
By pressing the and softkeys, the entire
edited machine parameters file (L444) is deleted without any further request for
confirmation. The DELETE" function has no effect on machine parameters data
stored in system memory.
4.5 Load (CC 220 / Type1 osa)

Loading with CC 220:
LOAD
By pressing the softkey the following operating level is reached:
LOAD
*SELECT FILE SEARCH FOR
DEVICES *STATUS NUMBER DFS FILE START
*SELECT
DEVICES
The softkey accesses the operating level
LOAD, *SELECT DEVICES, V24.2

*INTER *DCR *DCR *CCDISK *XTRANS
FACE 4800 BAUD 9600 BAUD 9600 BAUD 9600 BAUD
The transfer rate most appropriate to the device must be selected. The active baud
rate is displayed in reverse video.
*INTER
FACE
By pressing the interface from which data should be loaded is
selected:
LOAD, *SELECT DEVICES, *INTERFACE

V24. 1 *DNC CHANNEL
20 MA V24. 2 (Optional)
Pressing return twice restores the original operating level:
LOAD
DEVICES *STATUS NUMBER DFS FILE START
Handshake with V24.1 / 20mA and V24.2

To transfer data with a software handshake, the
*SOFTWARE
*STATUS CONTROL
and then the should be actuated.
FILE
NUMBER
The file is selected by pressing the softkey and entering the
number 444 (MP file) or by using the cursor to select.
START
By pressing the softkey, the transfer of the externally stored
machine parameters file into the CNC is initiated.
− 15 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
If *DEVICE CONTROL is used to read out, *DEVICE CONTROL must also be used
to read in.
At baud rates < 600 only software handshake is permissible.
FILE
NUMBER
number L 444 (MP file) or by using the cursor to select.
START
Loading with the Type1 osa:
LOAD
By pressing the softkey the following operating level is reached
LOAD
DEVICES NUMBER DFS FILE START
*SELECT
DEVICES
The softkey accesses the operating level
LOAD, *SELECT DEVICES, PC CHANNEL

*INTER
FACE
The transfer rate most appropriate to the device must be selected, if V24.1/ 20mA is
selected (see also CC220).
*INTER
FACE
Press to select the interface from which data should be loaded:
The PC channel enables the program (file) to be loaded from the internal hard disk
of the Type1 osa PC. Loading is possible from a device with a serial interface via the
V24.1 /20mA interface:
LOAD, *SELECT DEVICES, *INTERFACE

V24. 1
20 MA PC CHANNEL
Pressing return twice restores the original operating level:
LOAD PC CHANNEL
DEVICES NUMBER DFS FILE START
Handshake with V24.1 / 20mA

To transfer data with a software handshake, the
*SOFTWARE
*STATUS CONTROL
and softkeys should be actuated.
− 16 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
FILE
NUMBER
number L 444 (MP file) or by using the cursor to select.
START
If data are to be transfered from the Type1 osa display to the Type1 osa module, this
Load procedure can be controlled via the Data transfer from PC −> NC"
selection window.


L 444 MACHINE PARAMETER 24.03 23319 RWED
Data transfer from PC −> NC
File MP010296.txt
Path c:\osa1_ap2
DFS Identifier (DFS,L 444,MACHINE PARAMETER 102,RWED)
File: Path selection:

english.txt [..]
START
MP010296.txt [−a−]
MEM log2_96.txt [−c−]
MEM Prog1.txt ABORT
Prog2.txt
MAC Prog3.txt
Prog3.txt
Prog3.txt
E
For a description of the operating sequence, see page 20.
Once all MP data has been transferred or integrated, the machine parameters
should be stored in the EEPROM in nonvolatile form (see 4.3 TRANSFER, or 4.7
MANAGE EEPROM)*
− 17 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.6 Output (CC 220 / Type1 osa)
OUTPUT
After pressing the softkey, the same operating levels for
selecting devices, baud rates and interfaces as appeared under LOAD (refer to
appropriate heading) are called up.
The files of the Type1 osa module (machine parameters, part programs etc.) can
be saved on the hard disk of the Type1 osa display. Please note the following
sequences for data output:
Output with text

If the machine parameters are stored in control without text, the machine parameter
texts should be generated before they are output for documentation. To do this it
may be necessary to delete L 444 (see also chapter 4.8!) before regenerating with
texts (see 4.2 Editing").


D 1 LOGBOOK MONITOR E
D 2 RELOADING OPERATING PROGRAM E
D 3 CLEAR ALL MEMORY E
D 4 MACHINE PARAMETERS PROGRAM E
D 5 INTERNAL REF. POINT OFFSET E
D 6 INTERFACE DATA E
D 7 COMMUNICATION STORAGE DISPLAY E
D 9 MANAGE EEPROM E
D 21 LOGIC ANALYSER E
D 22 AXIS OSCIL. E
D 23 CONTOUR DISPLAY E
D 24 AXIS OPTIMISATION E
MEMORY USED BY DIAGNOSTIC 4156 OTHERS: 72042

SERVICE FUNCTION
LOAD OUTPUT START DELETE
Before the machine parameter program is output, start the diagnostic machine
START
parameter program (softkey ) by either selecting with cursor
keys or entering D4".
− 18 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters


MEMORY USED BY PROGRAM 28219 OTHERS: 34690

The actual machine parameter file L444" then appears in the menu. If you press
OUTPUT
the softkey you will be required to select a file.



OUTPUT PC CHANNEL
*SELECT
STATUS FILE
DEVICES
SELECT
DEVICES
Ensure that the correct output interface is preset with the softkey.
(see status line above the softkey to check)
FILE
Press the softkey and select by either using the cursor keys or
entering D4".
− 19 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters



OUTPUT FILE NUMBER 444
*SELECT
STATUS FILE START
DEVICES
Data transfer from the control unit (NC) to the hard disk (PC) is called up using the
START
softkey .
If data in the Type1 osa display are to be stored, the new selection window Data
transfer from NC −> PC" appears:


Data transfer from NC −> PC
File MP010296.TXT
Path c:\osa1_ap2
DFS Identifier
File: Path selection:

english.txt [..]
START
L1.txt [−a−]
MEM log2_96.txt [−c−]
MEM Prog1.txt ABORT
Prog2.txt
MAC Prog3.txt
Prog3.txt
Prog3.txt
E
Enter the file name in the upper entry field which the machine parameter program is
to be stored under in on the hard disk, e.g. MP010296.txt" for machine parameters
from 01 Feb. 96, txt ending for text file.
Remember to include a full stop in the file name. The stop should be preceded by a
maximum of 8 characters (no special characters such as . , ; ! ? etc.) and followed
by a maximum of 3 characters.
− 20 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
After entering the file name, press the TAB key and keep it pressed down until the
entry position (position currently highlighted by the cursor) is on the START field.
Now start data transfer by pressing the ENTER key. If you do not wish to carry out a
data transfer or you want to use another file name, use the TAB key to reach ABORT
and press the ENTER key.
Once transfer has started, a window appears, indicating which stage the data
transfer is currently at.
4.7 Manage EEPROM

If the machine parameters are loaded into the EEPROM of the CP/MEM 5card (CC
220) or the FEPROM of the Type1 osa module, they are safeguarded against loss.
This ensures that even after a power loss (e.g. battery failure), the customerspe
cific machine parameters are still available whenever required.
In the diagnostic" operating mode the softkeys
SERVICE
FUNCTION START
and then should be pressed.
Further information may be found in Type1/CC 220/320 Diagnosis, Operation,

Application", order no. 1070 073 305.
After program number 9 (EEPROM management) is entered and confirmed by

pressing ENTER, the CNC carries out CONTROL RESET. The following display
appears:

LIST OF PROGRAMS FOR OUTPUT

NO NAME OF PROGRAM IN RAM SAME
0 MACHINE PARAMETERS YES NO
MEMORY USED IN PROGRAM 943 OTHERS: 3258

EDIT L 444
SELECT DELETE COPY EEPROM

PROGR.
All programs in the EEPROM (FEPROM) area are listed.

The IN RAM" column indicates whether the listed files are present in RAM. The
SAME" column shows whether the contents of the file in EEPROM (FEPROM) are
the same as those of the corresponding file in RAM.
− 21 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
EEPROM
PROGR.
Now press the softkey and enter the appropriate code number.
The following display appears:

LIST OF PROGRAMS FOR OUTPUT

NO NAME OF PROGRAM IN RAM SAME
0 MACHINE PARAMETERS YES NO
LANGUAGE ENGLISH

PROGRAM EEPROM
MACHINE PROGRAM START

PARAMETERS AREA
The softkeys in reverse video indicate the EEPROM (FEPROM) areas to be

programmed. Since only the machine parameters and no tables or programs are
to be transferred in our example, deactivate the softkey PROGRAM AREA (softkey
reverts to normal text).
Programming may then be started via softkey START (softkey now appears in
reverse video). The message PROGRAMMING IS ACTIVE" appears in the
command line while programming is taking place, together with the number of
bytes which have already been transferred to EEPROM. The NC may not be
operated during programming.
The character *" preceding list number 0" indicates that the machine parameters
were transferred to the EEPROM (FEPROM).
Programming is complete when the START" softkey no longer appears in reverse

video. The entire EEPROM memory store is initialised if this programming
procedure is taking place for the first time. This lasts about 5 minutes.
When programming is complete, the display indicates that the status of the
machine parameters in the RAM is the same as that in EEPROM (FEPROM)
(column SAME: YES).
− 22 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
4.8 Management of the machine parameters

The machine parameters program (D4) is stored in the CC 220 control unit’s
EPROM or the Type1 osa module FEPROM area as a program capable of being
run, and can be initiated in DIAGNOSTIC" operating mode. It enables access to
machine parameter data.
A distinction should be made between machine parameter data in the form of an

MP record stored internally in the RAM area and the machine parameters file L444.
Only the values in the MP record determine the behaviour of the control system.
Machine parameters file L444 is only required if machine parameters need to be
edited or, for example, output to or read in from an external storage medium. L444
can always be generated from the currently active MP record (with/without text).
The MP record can only be modified by TRANSFERRING" an appplication file or

machine parameters file L 444.
If a valid MP record, or one which has been adapted to the particular machine, is
active in the control, file L444 is no longer required and can be deleted (thus saving
memory space). Diagnostic program D9 EEPROM MANAGEMENT" uses the MP
record to program the EEPROM (or FEPROM) area. The record is displayed
onscreen in the list of programs to be output" as a file with the number 0" and the
text MACHINE PARAMETERS".
IMPORTANT
It is also possible to program file L444 into the EEPROM (FEPROM) area. It should,
however, be noted that L444 requires considerably more memory area than the MP
record. This could mean that valuable EEPROM (FEPROM) memory space is
being unnecessarily wasted.
The MP record is located in a RAM area which the user has no access to. By
contrast, the file L444 (if present) is located in the user RAM. If the machine
parameter data is to be edited, the system copies file L444 from user RAM into a
special RAM area, which we will call EDIT memory. Only here can machine
parameters be edited or read in/out.
IMPORTANT
If machine parameters are to be edited when there are not enough free RAM
memory locations, the message MEMORY FULL" is output.
Remedy: Activate Control reset" to gain more free memory space.
− 23 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Operation
Machine parameters
− 24 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Overview
Machine parameters
5. Machine parameters
Here you will find the machine parameters for the Type1 osa M / T and CC 220 M / T control unit series. The way in
which individual parameters are displayed will depend on the type of control system used (T or M) and the options
applicable in each case. The values specified for the various parameters correspond to the input values.
Specific information on the SERVO i, SCP, PIC250 control unit series relates to the CC 220 control unit series. Infor
mation on the Type1 osa modul 3 / 5 control unit series relates to the Type1 osa control unit series. For explanations
of hardware configuration in the control unit series, refer to the CC 220 Connection conditions part 1" manual and in
the Type1 osa Connection conditions" manual.
5.1 Machine parameter sets
P 100 AXIS PARAMETERS
P 500 SPEEDS
P 1000 AXIS DYNAMICS
P 1500 POSITIONS
P 2000 AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
P 2500 POTENTIOMETER
P 3000 POWERUP STATE
P 3500 COLOUR SETTINGS
P 3600 GREYSCALE SETTINGS
P 4000 CPL PARAMETERS
P 4500 ZERO OFFSETS
P 5000 SUPPRESSION TABLE
P 5500 DEVICE SELECTION
P 6000 PLC PARAMETERS
P 6100 ELECTRONIC LIMIT SWITCH NORMAL
P 6200 ELECTRONIC LIMIT SWITCH FAST
P 6300 LASER APPLICATIONS *)
P 6400 TANGENTIAL TOOL CONTROL *)
P 6500 CENTRE PARAMETERS *)
P 6600 COMPENSATION PARAMETERS
P 6800 CONTOURDEPENDENT FEEDRATE OVERRIDE
P 7000 SPINDLE PARAMETERS
P 7100 SPINDLE PARAMETERS 2ND SPINDLE **)
P 7200 EXACT TAPPING
P 7500 TURNING MACHINE **)
P 7600 CAXIS PARAMETERS
P 8500 DNC INTERFACE WITH SIMPLE PROTOCOL***)
P 8600 DNC INTERFACE WITH LSV2 PROTOCOL***)
P 8700 FMS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE WITH BAB***)
P 9000 ADDRESS SELECTION
P 9500 AXIS PROCESSORS
P 9900 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
*) only in Type1 osa M and CC 220 M,

**) only in Type1 osa T and CC 220 T
***) only in CC 220 M and CC 220 T
− 25 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Overview
Machine parameters
− 26 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 100 Axis parameters
Machine parameters

P 101 No. of axes
[SYN] 3 [ASY] 1
This parameter is used to specify the number of applied system axes to be used as
synchronous/asynchronous axes (depending on option, CC 220: max. 8; Type1
osa: max. 5). The sum of both values should correspond to the total number of axes
in the system.
The spindle is treated as an asynchronous axis and must be taken into account at
this point (analog output as asynchronous axis). At least 2 synchronous axes
must be applied.
P102 Axis addresses (− = not defined)
[1.A] X [2.A] Y [3.A] Z [4.A] −
The machine parameter allocates logical addresses to the individual system axes
(designated in the machine parameters as [1.A]" to max. [8.A]"). The axes are
then operated via these logical addresses in part programs or CPL programs.
Permissible logical addresses: A−C, E, O, S−Z.
These addresses should not overlap with auxiliary function addresses (see
P 2001) or with polar coordinates’ addresses (P 9909)!
Where an axis is specified as a spindle in parameter 7001, the S" address may
only be allocated to this system axis. However, the spindle address should not be
specified here; a −" is entered in its place. For setting the spindle parameters, see
parameter set 7000.
Always bear in mind that all synchronous axes are specified before the
asynchronous axes in P 102.
IMPORTANT
The individual axes can be allocated different addresses to the ones given for the
screen display. See P 122.
The allocation of the individual system axes to inputs/outputs of the SERVOicards
can be specified via P 9502!
P 103 Axis format postdecimal position Range of values: 0 − 4
[1.A] 3 [2.A] 3 [3.A] 3 [4.A] 3
By means of this parameter, you can specify the postdecimal positions in the
display, as well as the computational accuracy (resolution, increment size). In
parameter set 9000, you can (amongst other things) specify the total number of
digits for every address letter.
Example: Determining the size of increments

0 = 1 Increment = 1 mm
1 = 1 Increment = 1/10 mm
4 = 1 Increment = 1/10000 mm
− 27 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 104 Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev (0 = linear scale) Range of values: 10 − 8000
[1.A] 1000 [2.A] 1000 [3.A] 1000 [4.A] 1000
The number of strokes of the measuring system encoder (e.g. 1000" at 1000
pulses/rev.) should be entered here. P 104 is used for checking markers, i.e. by
monitoring the pulses between two cyclic reference markings of a rotary encoder.
Enter 0" for the corresponding system axis when using a linear scale or for
encoders with more than 8000 strokes (e.g. for Caxis encoder).
The number of strokes must be entered between two cyclic reference markings for
distancecoded measuring systems. The watchdog on each individual axis can be
switched off if a HIGH level prevails at the axisrelated NC input INHIBIT
MEASURING SYSTEM MONITOR (23.x).
IMPORTANT
The value entered here for the spindle axis must correspond to P7022.
P 105 Measuring system evaluation in pulses/incr. Range of values: 0.025 − 24.000000
[1.A] 0.500000 [2.A] 0.500000 [3.A] 0.500000 [4.A] 0.500000
The evaluation depends on the number of strokes of the encoder, the leadscrew
pitch, the gearing transmission ratio and the required resolution.
The value entered here for the spindle axis must correspond to the value in P7024.
Calculation formula for linear axis:

No. of strokes x transmission ratio
= Measuring system evaluation
Lead screw pitch x resolution
Resolutions:
1 m m = 1000 [ Incr./mm]; if P 9904 = MM and P 103 = 3
10 mm = 100 [ Incr./mm]; if P 9904 = MM and P 103 = 2
100 mm = 10 [ Incr./mm]; if P 9904 = MM and P 103 = 1
− 28 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Examples of calculations for linear axes
Encoder: 2500 [pulses/rev]

fixed coupling spindle/encoder
Lead screw pitch: 10 [ mm/rev]
Resolution: 1 m m = 1000 [Incr./mm]
2500 [pulses/rev]
= 0.25 [Pulses/incr.] Input: 0.25
10 [ mm/rev] x 1000 [ Incr./mm]
Encoder: 2500 [pulses/rev]

Lead screw pitch: 10 [mm/rev]
Gearing: 1 : 5 (transmission ratio)
As the spindle is the driving component and the
encoder the driven part, the encoder rotates
5 times for every time the spindle rotates.
Resolution: 1 m m = 1000 [Incr./mm]

2500 [pulses/rev] x 5
= 1.25 [Pulses/incr.] Input: 1.25
10 [mm/rev] x 1000 [incr./mm]
Calculation formulae for rotary axes:
When programming in degrees(e.g. C−axis)
No. of strokes [ pulses/rev ] Measuring system evaluation

=
360 [deg/rev ] x resolution [pulses/incr.]
Note:
Parameters P501 − P508 and P511 should be entered accordingly
in degrees, degrees/min. etc.
When programming in revolutions
No. of strokes [pulses/rev]

= Measuring system evaluation
Resolution [incr./rev ] [ pulses/incr. ]
Note:
Parameters P501 − P508 and P511 should be entered accordingly
in degrees, degrees/min. etc.
Resolutions:
1000 [ Incr./deg ] if P103 = 3
100 [ Incr./deg ] if P103 = 2
10 [ Incr./deg ] if P103 = 1
P 106 Locking the asynchronous axes or suppressing the spindle display (YES/NO)
[1.A] NO [2.A] NO [3.A] NO [4.A] YES
If this parameter was set to YES" for an asynchronous axis, the following functions
may no longer be carried out: jogging, approach reference point, positioning via
the interface (external setpoint input) and largescale screen display formats.
− 29 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
YES" should always be entered for the spindle axis. NO" must be entered for
ANALOG" type axes.
IMPORTANT
For Caxis: If the spindle axis is separated from the axis of the tool being operated
(P7604 does not equal P7001), NO" must be entered for the corresponding
system axis of the tool.
P 107 Type of axis (ROTARY/LINEAR/ENDLESS/ANALOG)

[1.A] LINEAR [2.A] LINEAR [3.A] LINEAR [4.A] ROTARY
Specifying the type of axis
LINEAR: The axis can only be moved within the travel limit range (see
P 1505 and P 1506). Where there is active suppression of soft
ware limits (P 1504 = YES), the maximum range of motion will be
equal to 2 * 10 9 increments.
ROTARY: The axis can only be moved within the travel limit range (see
P 1505 and P 1506). Where there is active suppression of soft
ware limits (P 1504 = YES), the maximum range of motion will be
equal to 2 * 10 9 increments. The only difference between
ROTARY" and LINEAR" axis types is that LINEAR" axes are
programmed in mm" and ROTARY" axes are programmed in
degrees.
ENDLESS: When programming a single block, endless rotary axes are
treated in the same way as ROTARY" axis types. During a block,
the axis is first moved to its programmed end position. However,
at the end of block a modulo calculation is then carried out (mod
360) on the end position. In this way, the end position (if it lies
outside the limits) 0º x end position t 360º is always changed
back into the range 0º x end position t 360º . This means that
the endless rotary axis can be traversed in one and the same
direction as often as necessary.
ANALOG: In the case of an axis type defined as ANALOG", a voltage pro
portional to the programmed value is output at the analog output
(without measuring system feedback). The maximum value
which can be programmed should be specified in P 501. This
value corresponds to an output voltage of +10V. The output volt
age is adapted rampwise as setpoint values change in accor
dance with the acceleration value stored in machine parameter
P (for example, see P 1002). If an axis was defined as ANALOG",
an axis address must be allocated to this axis in
P 102. Every analog axis must be defined as a synchronous axis
(P 101).
IMPORTANT
If Hirth logic (P 108) is activated for ROTARY" and ENDLESS" axis types and at
the same time parameters are set for the affected axis P 117 by a YES" input, their
positional value in MACHINE operating mode will always be displayed in the range
0o <= position value < 360 o.
− 30 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
An additive compensation of the axis set position is permitted for the axis type
ROTARY (provided it is not declared as Hirth axis P 108) using the digital
handwheel.
The LINEAR axis type can also be moved endlessly" in one direction. See P 6516
for more detailed explanations and settings (only Type1 osa M / CC 220M).
An external acceleration input (see P1002 ff.) via a wordcoupled PLC is not
effective for the ANALOG axis type.
P 108 Positions per circle for the Hirth axis (0 = no Hirth axis) Range of values: 0 − 360000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
An input in the range from 1 to 360000 defines the axis concerned as a Hirth axis.
Hirth axes are rotary axes which can take part in interpolation, but may only travel to
certain positions.
P 108 only applies to ROTARY and ENDLESS axis types. The number of positions
which may be approached per 360 o is entered here (Hirth logic).
P 108 = 0 no Hirth logic

P 108 u 0 Hirth logic
If 0" is entered, the parameters P 110, P 117, P 119 and P 120 have no effect.
Example:
P 108 = 360 360 approachable positions per revolution
P 108 = 720 720 approachable positions per revolution
IMPORTANT
‘ P 108 may only be set to values greater than 0" in the case of rotary axes
programmed in degrees (not in the case of rotary axes programmed in revo
lutions).
‘ The Hirth axis reference point and limit switch must lie on the Hirth grid.
‘ Hirth axes may not be operated by handwheel or online compensation with

handwheel".
‘ If positions have been programmed which do not lie on the Hirth grid, P 121
should be taken into consideration.
P 109 Currently unused Range of values: 1
[1.A] 1.00 [2.A] 1.00 [3.A] 1.00 [4.A] 1.00
− 31 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 110 Position programming (YES/NO)

[1.A] NO [2.A] NO [3.A] NO [4.A] NO
If a value greater than 0" was input in P 108, it may be specified in P 110 whether
that axis should be programmed in degrees or in positions.
Enter YES" if the axis should be programmed in positions. The axis letter is then
programmed together with the position number (used in the case of tool
magazines, for example).
In this instance the position number 0 always corresponds to the position 0"
degrees.
Example:
Tool magazine (asynchronous axis : A). P 110 = YES, P 108 = 12.
The tool magazine is subdivided into 12 positions (i.e. there are 12 approachable
positions in any one revolution of the axis).
Programming (if P 111 = 2):
N 100 A 7 = magazine traverses to position 7 (in positive direction)
N 110 A−6 = magazine traverses to position 6 (in negative direction)
N 120 A 0 = magazine traverses to position 0 (in positive direction)
IMPORTANT
P 110 can also be combined with P 111.
P 111 Hirth programming mode (1, 2, 3, 4)

[1.A] 3 [2.A] 3 [3.A] 3 [4.A] 3
The programming mode of normal" rotary axes, endless axes and Hirth axes can
be defined in P 111.
Entering 1" = programming with search logic"
Entering 2" = programming with +/− sign determines direction"
Entering 3" = programming as for a normal rotary axis
Entering 4" = combination of 2" and 3" (effective only with synchronous rotary
axis)
1080 o
720 o
730 o
360 o
370 o
0o 380
o
350 o 10 o
20 o
+ −
990 o 630 o 270 o 90 o 450 o 810 o
o
180
o
540
o
900
− 32 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Search logic: Search logic means that the axis always travels to the pro
grammed position via the shortest route (in relation to the unit
circle) (maximum distance to be traversed = 180 o).
The actual position equals e.g. 350 o. A set position of 10 o is
then entered. Physically, this position occurs several times for a
rotary axis
( 10 o, 370 o, 730 o , 1090 o etc.) . The search logic now se
lects as a set position the physical position which is the shortest
distance from the the actual position − in this case 370 o . Only
absolute values may be programmed.
A −" sign is ignored by the control.
Any G91 which may be active is not taken into consideration dur
ing this process.
Examples:
Actual position = 350 o
N100 A10 axis traverses 20 o to 370 o
(in pos. direction)
or N100 A−10 as for A10" (+/− sign is
ignored)
or N100 A180 axis traverses 170 o to 180 o
(in neg. direction)
or N100 A710 axis does not traverse.
+/− sign: The direction from which the set position is approached is en
tirely dependent on the programmed sign (max. traverse path
per record < 360 o). If a negative sign is programmed, the axis
approaches the set position in negative direction; if the sign is
positive, it approaches in the positive direction (positive signs do
not need to be programmed). The actual position equals e.g.
730 o. The value −20" is now programmed. Physically, this
position occurs several times for a rotary axis
( 20 o, 380 o, 740 o , 1100 o etc.) . The axis traverses in nega
tive direction to the position corresponding to 20 o − in this case
380 o. Any G91 which may be active is effective for this setting.
Examples:
Actual position = 350 o
(in pos. direction)
(in neg. direction)
(in pos. direction)
(in neg. direction)
or N100 A350 axis does not traverse
or N100 A710 axis does not traverse.
− 33 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Normal: During programming, the rotary axis behaves like a normal"

rotary axis (ROTARY" axis type).
The conversion to positions between 0 o and 360 o at the end
of the record here depends on P 107 (ROTARY/ENDLESS).
Both G90 and G91 have an effect on this type of axis.
Examples:
Actual position = 350 o; P 107 = ROTARY; G90 active
(in neg. direction)
or N100 A−10 axis traverses 360 o to −10 o
(in neg. direction)
(in neg. direction)
or N100 A−370 axis traverses 720 o to −370 o
(in neg. direction)
Combined: For absolute programming or ext. setpoint input:

Designate as under sign", where the max. traverse path per re
cord can now equal 360°.
Zero shifts can only be used for synchronous axes with internal
setpoint input (programming).
For incremental programming or ext. setpoint input:
As described under normal".
IMPORTANT
P 111 can also be combined with P 110.
P 112 Setpoint input (INTERNAL/EXTERNAL)
[1.A] INTERNAL [2.A] INTERNAL [3.A] INTERNAL [4.A] INTERNAL
It is possible to enter the setpoint value for synchronous or asynchronous axes

internally (CNC) or externally (PLC) (see also Interface Conditions Part 2, signals
O7.0 to 7.7).
It is not possible to specify the setpoint input from both locations − once in the CNC
and once in the PLC. Exception for external setpoint input: The CNC can output a
value to the interface by means of auxiliary functions. This value is then processed
in the PLC and passed back to the CNC.
P 113 Multi interface data BCD or binary coded (BIN/BCD)
[−] BIN
Certain signals are exchanged at the interface between the CC 220 or Type1 osa
and the interface controller.
The output may be coded in BCD or binary.
In the case of BCD" encoded values the +/− sign is specified via the interface,
whereas in the case of binary" encoded values, the figure must be coded in two’s
complement.
− 34 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 114 Ref. travel after measuring system monitoring block (YES/NO)
[1.A] YES [2.A] YES [3.A] YES [4.A] YES
With the help of parameter P 114 it is possible to specify whether an axis must
approach the reference point after the measuring system monitor block" has been
suppressed. The measuring system of the individual axes can be suppressed
(blocked) by means of interface signals 23.0 to 23.7. The monitoring function can
only be reactivated by resetting the relevant interface signal (23.x).
Example:
P 114 = YES The affected axis must travel to a new reference point.
P 114 = NO Reference point is retained − even if the measuring sys
tem was drawn − in case the axis had already travelled
to the reference point when interface signal 23.x was set.
It is not necessary to program in a new approach to
reference point.
P 115 Measuring system direction (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE)
[1.A] NEGATIVE [2.A] NEGATIVE [3.A] NEGATIVE [4.A] NEGATIVE
P 116 Servo output polarity (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE)
[1.A] NEGATIVE [2.A] NEGATIVE [3.A] NEGATIVE [4.A] NEGATIVE
Parameters P 115 and P 116 relate to the closed control loop. In this way the system
can if necessary be adapted to the setpoint input without any resoldering.
P 117 Modulo display in MACHINE operating mode
[1.A] NO [2.A] NO [3.A] NO [4.A] NO
If an axis is defined in P 108 as a Hirth axis, the type of display for this axis can also
be defined here, in MACHINE operating mode.
NO: The display value (actual value) may fall outside the limits
0 o<= display value <360 o.
YES: The display value always falls within the limits
0o < o
=display value < 360 . For this purpose, the position value is
continually transformed by modulo calculation (mod 360) in the
o<
range 0 =X < 360 o . This type of display is only possible if para
meter P 111 for the axis concerned is set to 1" , 2" or 4".
Example: P 107 = ROTARY; P 108 = 360; P 117 = YES
Actual val. Display

72 o 72.000
360 o 0.000
−721o 359.000
− 35 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 118 Offset drive in mm or degrees (lag)

[1.A] 0.0000 [2.A] 0.0000 [3.A] 0.0000 [4.A] 0.0000
By means of parameter P 118, the drift" of the system as a whole can be corrected.
The value shown while the axis is stationary in the lag" display in control
diagnostics" mode should be input.
Example:
Lag display: 0.012 mm
Entry: 0.012 mm
IMPORTANT
There is no measuring system feedback for ANALOG" axis types. Thus the lag
display does not show any meaningful values. In this case the offset must be
measured by means of a voltmeter. The following then applies:
P 118 = P 501 x Offset [V]

x (−1)
10 V
In the axis optimisation" diagnostic program (D24) it is possible to transfer values
found there automatically to P 118.
P 119 Position indication in automatic and manual modes (YES/NO )

[1.A] NO [2.A] NO [3.A] NO [4.A] NO
Parameter P 119 affects the display of end point, actual value, residual distance"
in AUTOMATIC and MANUAL DATA INPUT (MDI) modes.
YES: Indicates the actual position in terms of positions. A modulo calcu
lation is performed on the displayed value if P 111 is set to 1" or 2".
If P 111 is set to 3, the position is indicated without recourse
to a modulo calculation.
NO: Displays the actual position in degrees. No modulo calculation is
performed on the displayed value.
IMPORTANT
NO" must be entered if P 108 > 36000.
P 120 Run time error caused by faulty Hirth axis programming (YES/NO)
[−] NO
YES: If the programmed value does not lie exactly on the Hirth grid, a run
time error appears.
NO: If the programmed value does not lie exactly on the Hirth grid, a run
time error is suppressed. The CNC then automatically moves the
axis concerned to the next possible Hirth grid position according to
the programmed value.
IMPORTANT
− 36 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
The runtime error is effective for synchronous axes only. A runtime error will not
appear with asynchronous axes (entry therefore: NO).
P 121 Display program value (YES/NO)

[−] NO
YES: When the end point, actual value, residual value" display is shown
in AUTOMATIC and MDI modes, the programmed value of an axis is
also displayed (without taking any active corrections into account).
NO: The programmed value is not displayed.
P 122 Axis address for display (Range of values: characters A" to Z", *" and −")
[1.A] * [2.A] * [3.A] * [4.A] *
Using this parameter, an address character for the axis display on the CNC
screen can be allocated to each axis independently of P 102 (e.g. for the display of
slave axes).
This possibility is significant if, for example, the position entry for an external axis
needs to be retained by the PLC. In this case, the position would have to be
transferred in the part program to the PLC, e.g. by means of auxiliary function O".
However, an axis with address O" should be defined in P 102 at the same time, in
order to maintain a clear allocation between the axis position programmed in the
part program and the axis display on the screen.
The definition of an auxiliary function address is only permissible, though, if this

address is not being used for other purposes (e.g. in P 102)! P 122 offers a way
around this problem.
Possible inputs:
*": The axis address is displayed, as defined in P 102.
−": The corresponding axis address is not displayed on the screen.
A" to Z": The corresponding axis is displayed on the screen under the ad
dress characters entered here; even if this axis was defined in P
102 with no address or a different address.
Examples:
P 102: [1.A] X [2.A] Y [3.A] Z [4.A] −

P 122: [1.A] * [2.A] * [3.A] * [4.A] O
Axes 1−3 are displayed under the addresses X, Y and Z, the 4th
axis under address O".
P 102: [1.A] X [2.A] Y [3.A] Z [4.A] U

P 122: [1.A] * [2.A] Z [3.A] Y [4.A] B
Display: 1st axis:X; 2nd axis:Z; 3rd axis:Y; 4th axis:B
P 123 Display of auxiliary functions in line 22 (0=OFF)

(Range of values: 0−3 or 0−6, depending on number of parameters under P 2001)
− 37 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
[1.] 0 [2.] 0
In addition to the display of F and S auxiliary functions in line 21 in group operating

modes MACHINE, NC (AUTOMATIC) and MDI, a further two auxiliary functions can
be displayed in line 22.
The numbers of the auxiliary functions to be displayed must be entered in P 123
(see example). Entering 0" deactivates this function.
Example:
The following auxiliary functions are defined in P 2001: [1.] [2.] S [3.] T
If the auxiliary functions M and T are now displayed in line 22

[1.] 1 [2.] 3 must be entered in P 123.
If the auxiliary functions M and S are displayed in line 22
[1.] 1 [2.] 2 must be entered in P 123.
IMPORTANT
If auxiliary functions are permanently displayed in line 22, the display of axis
positions in group operating mode MACHINE is switched to small display as soon
as six axes (and not seven axes) are present.
P 124 Coupled axes (1−3 = 1st axis pair, 3−4 = 2nd axis pair)
(Range of values: 0 to the maximum number of synchronous axis present in the system.
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0
Two synchronous axes may be coupled together in software fashion via the
G function 995.
Specify which synchronous axes are to be coupled using P 124. A maximum of two
axis pairs can be defined (see example).
Example:
Six synchronous axes are defined in the system (1st axis=X, 2nd axis=Y,
3rd axis=Z, 4th axis=U, 5th axis=V, 6th axis=W).
The U axis is to be coupled with the X axis and the V axis is to be coupled with the
Y axis:
Input in P 124: [1.] 1 [2.] 4 [3.] 2 [4.] 5
IMPORTANT
If an axis coupling is declared in P 124, the axis coupling is activated via the
G function (G 995). If an axis coupling has not been declared, axis coupling is
possible via interface. These two types of coupling are mutually exclusive.
− 38 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 500 Speeds
Machine parameters
P 500 Speeds
IMPORTANT
Depending on the specifications in P 105 and P 107, parameters P 501 to P 505
should be entered in m/min or 1000 degrees/min:
P 501 Max. feedrate in m/min, 1000 degrees/min Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 10.000 [2.A] 10.000 [3.A] 10.000 [4.A] 10.000
The maximum feedrate determines the maximum velocity of the axes (rapid feed
G0). The value in P 501 must be x the value in P 508. If an axis is defined as a
spindle, the value for the max. feedrate must correspond to the max. spindle
speed.
Example:
Linear axis: 10.000 − max. feedrate of 10 m/min
Rotary axis: 1.800 − max. feedrate of 5 rpm (1800 o/min)
Analog axis: 3.000 − max. voltage of 10V is output if the value 3" is pro
grammed in at the relevant analog output.
IMPORTANT
The range of values for asynchronous axes is dependent on P 103.
P103 Range of values
1, 2 0.001 − 1000.000
3 0.001 − 300.000
4 0.001 − 99.999
The following generally applies for Type1 osa M / CC 220 M:

The maximum axis feedrate possible is limited for P 103=0,1,2,3 to 150 m/min. The
maximum feedrate remains at 200 m/min. This results in the following for the
parameter P 501:
P 501 [x.A] 0.001−150.000 m/min
P 502 Ref. point speed in m/min or 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.001 <
= P 1006
[1.A] 10.000 [2.A] 10.000 [3.A] 10.000 [4.A] 10.000
P 502 specifies the maximum speed at which the axes approach the reference
point. This speed is only effective in the following cases:
‘ repeated approach to a reference cam or
‘ always for a distance coded measuring system. The CNC calculates the max.
permissible speed. If the input in P 502 is greater, the internally calculated
speed will be effective.
− 39 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 500 Speeds
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
− It can be determined, using the interface signals REDUCTION ACROSS
(O4.0 − O4.7), whether the speed under P 502 should be effective during the
first reference point approach.
− G0 feederate is used internally.
P 503 First reduction in reference point speed in m/min or 1000 deg/min

Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 0.500 [2.A] 0.500 [3.A] 0.500 [4.A] 0.500
By means of parameter P 503, the initial reduced speed at which the axis travels
between the reference cam and the zero mark is specified. Using the IF signals
REDUCTION ACROSS (A4.0 to A4.7), specify whether the speed P 502 or P 503
applies for the first reference point approach.
Recommendation:
Should be 1/20 of the value of P 502!
P 504 Second reduction in reference point speed in m/min or 1000 deg/min

[1.A] 0.200 [2.A] 0.200 [3.A] 0.200 [4.A] 0.200
The second speed reduction is determined in parameter P 504. It becomes active

after overrunning the zero reference mark in the reference point.
Recommendation:
Should not be greater than P 503!
IMPORTANT
Parameters P 503 and P 504 have no significance where a distancecoded
measuring system is employed.
P 502 or
P 503 P 503
V
1. Red
V
ref
V
2. Red
Zero marker
Ref. cam
− 40 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 500 Speeds
Machine parameters
P 505 to P 508 Parameters 505, 506, 507 and 508 specify the maximum manual feedrates (Slow",
Medium", Fast" and Highspeed") which take effect for synchronous and
asynchronous axes in orientation mode.
P 505 Manual feed Slow m/min, 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 0.100 [2.A] 0.100 [3.A] 0.100 [4.A] 0.100
IMPORTANT
− The range of values 0.001 − P 501 applies for asynchronous axes.
− Definable speed values can also be transferred from the PLC via
the CNC multi interface for synchronous and asynchronous axis!
P 506 Manual feed Medium m/min, 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 1.000 [2.A] 1.000 [3.A] 1.000 [4.A] 1.000
IMPORTANT
The range of values 0.001 − P 501 applies for asynchronous axes.
P 507 Manual feed Fast m/min, 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 5.000 [2.A] 5.000 [3.A] 5.000 [4.A] 5.000
IMPORTANT
P 508 Manual feed High−speed m/min, 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 10.000 [2.A] 10.000 [3.A] 10.000 [4.A] 10.000
IMPORTANT
P 509 Variable increment step Range of values: 1 − 1000000
[1.A] 1000 [2.A] 1000 [3.A] 1000 [4.A] 1000
Parameter P 509 specifies a variable incremental dimension for each axis. If the
step size selection switch of the setup operating panel is in N incr. position, the axis
traverses according to the increment number defined here when the Jog key is
actuated.
The increment size depends on the resolution of the axis concerned.
P 510 Manual feed Fast (G95) in mm/rev Range of values: 1 − 500
[1.A] 100 [2.A] 100 [3.A] 100 [4.A] 100
Parameter P 510 specifies Fast" manual feed in mm/rev which takes effect in
orientation mode.
The values for the Medium" and Slow" feed ranges are generated automatically
by the system. The Medium" feedrate amounts to 10% of the Fast" feedrate; the
Slow" feedrate is 1% of the Fast" feedrate.
− 41 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 500 Speeds
Machine parameters
P 511 Max. path speed in m/min Range of values: 0.001 − 200.000
[−] 10.000
This parameter sets a limit on the programmed feedrate value.
IMPORTANT
The path speed is the sum of the axis speed vectors involved in the tool path. The
path speed may therefore be greater than the maximum highspeed feedrate of
any one individual axis.
P 512 Feedrate limit via interface in m/min Range of values: 0.000 − 200.000
[−] 0.000
The current path speed is set to the maximum permissible snychronous path
speed specified in this machine parameter if the PLC interface O27.6 is HIGH. Once
the IF signal is detected, the feedrate limit becomes effective in the active block.
IMPORTANT
P 512 must be less than or equal to P 511 (max. feedrate value)!
If feedrate limitation is active, the feedrate potentiometer is only effective up to the

set feedrate value:
Example: P 511 max. feedrate value = 10.000 m/min

P 512 feedrate limitation = 5.000 m/min
The feedrate potentiometer is only effective in the range 0% to 50% if
O27.6 = HIGH
Feedrate limitation is not effective where asynchronous movements (jogging,

referencing,...) are involved.
− 42 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 1000 Axis dynamics
Machine parameters

P 1001 Nominal loop gain factor in (m/min)/mm or (1000 degrees/min)/degrees
[1.A] 1.00 [2.A] 1.00 [3.A] 1.00 [4.A] 1.00
The loop gain factor must be entered for each applied axis in this parameter field.
To ensure definition in path operation with several axis, the same loop gain values
must be entered for all axis taking part on one interpolation.
For this purpose the drives must first be adjusted to 10V. The loop gain factor for
each axis can then be calculated using the following formulae and entered into
P 1001.
Linear axis: Rotary axis:
max. axis feedrate [m/min] max. axis feedrate [ 1000 o/min ]
LF = KV =
lag [mm] lag [degrees ]
IMPORTANT
The loop gain value input via the machine parameter can be altered by calling a
G function (G14) if the loop gain programming" option is applied.
IMPORTANT
If feedforward is active, the parameter P 1021 instead of P 1001 is used for the
nominal loop gain factor.
CAUTION!
It is extremely important with regard to the axis behaviour of the machine that the
!
values are carefully determined and entered, since several options of P 1001 con
trol are used to calculate various data.
A maximum of 2 decimal places may be programmed, although some versions of
the machine parameters program allow 3 decimal spaces!
P 1002 Slope acceleration in m/s2 or. 1000 deg/s2 Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 0.500 [2.A] 0.500 [3.A] 0.500 [4.A] 0.500
Parameter 1002 determines the maximum acceleration of the individual axes

which can be entered from the interpolator (can be exceeded by the setpoint
output if necessary!).
P 501
P 1002 =
60 x acceleration time [s]
This parameter can be changed within a program by using G6. The limit values of
G6 are specified in parameters 1008 and 1009 (for synchronous axes only).
IMPORTANT
− If feedforward control is active, parameter P 1020 is used for slope
acceleration instead of P 1002, as long as other values have not been
specifically programmed (via G6) !
− In the case of an ANALOG" axis type, the following applies:
P 501 T = rise time from 0V to 10V of
P 1002 = [sec]
60 x T voltage at analog output
− 43 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
The slope acceleration values of P 1002 are overwritten by an external
acceleration input (via a wordcoupled PLC). The external acceleration values
apply only to asynchronous traverse movements (with external setpoint input; see
also P 112) and are modally effective (no deletion after control reset). The slope
acceleration values of P 1002 do not become effective until the PLC has transmitted
a 0 or the control unit is in powerup state or after Clear logic" or hardware reset.
During jogging or referencing, only the preset accleration values of P 1002 are
effective.
P 1003 Slope point automatic mode in m/min or 1000 deg/min

Range of values: Type1 osa T / CC 220 T: 0 − 99.999
Type1 osa M / CC 220 M: 0 − 150.000
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
Parameter 1003 defines the speed (slope point) for each axis for continuous path
operation (AUTOMATIC) during the acceleration or deceleration phases (see the
axis dynamics" diagram).
This slope point is not only effective for block transitions (e.g. as P 1007), but at
any time. When accelerating or braking there is always a speed jump in speed
range 0 to P 1003.
The speed jump during acceleration (0 to P 1003) or braking (P 1003 to 0) is

effective with interpolation modes G8, G9 and G108 (look ahead).
IMPORTANT
If the feedforward control" option is active (see P 1014 to P 1017 and P 3012),
P 1003 should be set to 0.
The following max. slope point applies for Type1 osa M / CC 220 M:
0.000 <= P 1003 <= 99.999 see above,
where 99.999 < P 1003 <= 150.000, P 1003 also has to be less than or equal to
P 501 (max. feedrate).
The slope point must be smaller than the commutation point.
P 1004 Slope point jog mode in m/min or 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0 − 99.999
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
Parameter 1004 defines the velocity point (slope point) for each axis in jogging
mode (orientation) (see the axis dynamics" diagram).
Example:
If, for example, a value of 2 [m/min] is entered in P 1004 for an axis, the velocity of
the axis jumps from 0 m/min to 2 m/min when it starts up. Subsequently, it behaves
under controlled acceleration until it reaches its programmed speed.
− 44 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Under continuous deceleration, it behaves in the same way until it reaches an axis
velocity of 2 m/min. From this speed, the axis is brought to a standstill by a jump in
velocity down to 0 m/min.
IMPORTANT
The range of values 0 − P 501 applies for asynchronous axes.
P 1005 Commutation acceleration in m/s 2 or 1000 deg/s2 Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] 0.100 [2.A] 0.100 [3.A] 0.100 [4.A] 0.100
Parameter 1005 specifies the acceleration affecting the commutation point (see
P 1006 and axis dynamics" diagram).
P 1005 must be less than P 1002.
IMPORTANT
The commutation acceleration values of P 1005 are overwritten by an external
acceleration input (via a wordcoupled PLC). The external acceleration values
apply only to asynchronous traverse movements (with external setpoint input; see
also P 112) and are modally effective (no deletion after control reset). The
commutation acceleration values of P 1005 do not become effective until the PLC
has transmitted a 0 or the control unit is in powerup state or after Clear logic" or
hardware reset. During jogging or referencing, only the preset accleration values
of P 1005 are effective.
P 1006 Commutation point in m/min or 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.000 − 99.999
[1.A] 40.000 [2.A] 40.000 [3.A] 40.000 [4.A] 40.000
Parameter 1006 specifies the commutation point (see axis dynamics" diagram).
The commutation point marks a change in accelerative behaviour and conse
quently serves the adjustment of the characteristic curve of the motor used.
IMPORTANT
G8
The maximum feedrate for G8 is limited by the commutation point.
The following generally apply for Type1 osa / CC 220 M:

The maximum axis feedrate possible is limited for P103=0,1,2,3 to 150 m/min. This
results in the following for parameter P1006:
P1006 [x.A] 0.001 − 150.000 m/min
− 45 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 1007 Max. change in feedrate in m/min or 1000 deg/min Range of values: 0.000 − 99.999
[1.A] 2.000 [2.A] 2.000 [3.A] 2.000 [4.A] 2.000
Parameter 1007 limits valid jumps in feedrate for the individual axes to a maximum
upper limit which may occur in continuous path slope operation (G8 or G108,
G109, G110) at transitions from block to block (see Axis dynamics" diagram, fig.
2).
IMPORTANT
If feedforward control is active, the parameter P 1022 is used for the max. change
in feedrate instead of P 1007.
If G9 is active then P 1007 has no meaning.
Axis dynamics
V [m/s]
prog.
P 1005
P 1006
P 1002
P 1003
P 1004
Figure 1
t [s]
Y
= Vactual
Workpiece
contour = V Ideal
X
0
V
y
P1007
t
0
V
x
P1007
t
0
V
Path
t
0
1st block Block 2nd block Figure 2
transition
− 46 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 1008 Minimum programmable slope acceleration in m/s2 or 1000 deg/s2

[1.A] 0.010 [2.A] 0.010 [3.A] 0.010 [4.A] 0.010
P 1008 limits the programmable downward acceleration of an axis with G6. This
limitation also applies for external slope acceleration inputs for synchronous and
asynchronous axes with asynchronous traverse movements from a wordcoupled
PLC (via communication memory).
P 1009 Maximum programmable slope acceleration in m/s2 or 1000 deg/s2

[1.A] 10.000 [2.A] 4.000 [3.A] 0.010 [4.A] 0.010
P 1009 limits the programmable upward acceleration of an axis with G6. This
limitation also applies for external slope acceleration inputs for synchronous and
asynchronous axes with asynchronous traverse movements from a wordcoupled
PLC (via communication memory).
P 1010 Min. loop gain factor in (m/min)/mm or (1000 deg/min)/deg Range of values: 0.01 − 20.00
[1.A] 0.10 [2.A] 0.10 [3.A] 0.10 [4.A] 0.10
Parameter P 1010 specifies the minimum permissible loop gain value with which
G14 can be programmed.
P 1011 Max. loop gain factor in (m/min)/mm or (1000 deg/min)/deg Range of values: P 1010 − 20.00
[1.A] 20.00 [2.A] 20.00 [3.A] 20.00 [4.A] 20.00
Parameter P 1011 specifies the maximum permissible loop gain value with which
G14 can be programmed.
P 1012 Lag limit under zerospeed control in mm Range of values: P 1508 − 99.000
[1.A] 1.000 [2.A] 1.000 [3.A] 1.000 [4.A] 1.000
Zerospeed control is a function for monitoring the measuring system. After a delay
(P 1013), it checks whether the axis lag exceeds the limiting value specified in P
1012. If it is exceeded the following error message is output: AXIS MONITORING.
The delay is used to suppress the lag after interpolation has been terminated.
A new setpoint input by the interpolator cancels the monitoring function.
IMPORTANT
‘ The zerospeed control does not work for spindle and analog output or
powered tools.
‘ In the event of a fault (axis lag at rest is too great) you should check the
following possible causes:
− Excessive axis drift (carry out offset calibration adjustment)
− Measuring system is not issuing any pulses (remedy: check measuring
system)
The error is cleared by CONTROL RESET.
‘ The zerospeed control can be switched off in parameter 1013 by inputting
0" for each separate axis individually.
P 1013 Waiting time for zerospeed control in sec (0=off) Range of values: P 9901 − 99.000
− 47 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
See P 1012.
P 1014 Max. feedforward speed coefficient Range of values: 0 − 11000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
P 1014 specifies the upper limiting value of the feedforward speed coefficient,
which can be programmed with G114.
IMPORTANT
‘ The machine parameter only works for applied feedforward control.
‘ For general information on feedforward control, see the programming
guide.
P 1015 Max. feedforward acceleration coefficient Range of values: 0 − 100000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
P 1015 specifies the upper limiting value of the feedforward acceleration

coefficient, which can be programmed with G114.
IMPORTANT
‘ The value entered should be lower than or equal to
(P 501/(P 1020 *0.0006))!
guide.
P 1016 Feedforward speed coefficient Range of values: 0 − 11000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
The feedforward control value for each synchronous axis can be calculated from
the command speed and command acceleration, weighted in each case by an
adjustable variable. The weighting factor for the speed can be specified in P 1016.
IMPORTANT
‘ The value entered must be lower than or equal to P 1014.
guide.
P 1017 Feedforward acceleration coefficient Range of values: 0 − 100000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
The feedforward control value for each synchronous axis can be calculated from
the command speed and command acceleration, weighted in each case by an
adjustable variable. The weighting factor for the acceleration can be specified in
P 1017.
− 48 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
‘ The value entered must be lower than or equal to P 1015.

guide.
P 1018 and P 1019 − Explanations
P 1018 and P 1019 control the path monitor" function. This function is responsible
for stopping sychronous and asynchronous axes in all operating modes at the
earliest possible moment if their movement is hindered (e.g. by collisions, tool
breakage). In this way, for example, damage to the torque clutch in case of tool
breakage can be avoided.
The lag of each individual axis is permanently monitored. If the value of the lag of an
axis exceeds a specified limit and is not at least partially reduced within a position
controller cycle (P 9901), the control recognises that the axis is obstructed, stops
the traversing movement by cancelling the signal READY 2 and displays a P2 error
with the corresponding axis address on the panel.
The limit value (or limit curve) of the lag is adjustable via machine parameters and
must be determined so that no error arises during normal axis movement
(acceleration/braking phases with/without slope, circular interpolation, rapid
traverse, etc.). The monitor must be able to respond quickly enough in case of
error.
Parameters 1018 and 1019 are used to define this limit curve. A constant share and
a variable (velocity dependent) share may be input.
It is necessary to adjust the constant share of the limit curve because otherwise the
monitor would respond to every small axis movement during standstill. The
constant share of the lag is adjusted via parameter P1018 in increments. Entering
0" deactivates path monitoring for the corresponding axis.
The variable share of the limit curve is proportional to the repective active
command velocity (at constant velocities). The relationship is as follows:
Variable share = (Max. permissible lag / Vmax) * Vset
A factor can be entered in P1019 which can obstruct the reaction of path monitoring
within specified tolerance limits, even if the maximum permissible lag (which only
applies for constant speed) is exceeded (see example). This is particulary
applicable to traversing phases with inconstant speed (e.g. slope etc.).
− 49 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Lag during normal traversing Lag with tool breakage

Lag Lag
Lag limit curve Limit curve
P1018 P1018
Time Time
T0 T1
Start of traversing movement T0: Moment of tool breakage
End of traversing movement T1: Path monitor response
Example for one axis:
Maximum permissible lag at axis standstill: 0.003 mm (=3 inc.)
Maximum axis speed for machine: 10 m/min
Maximum permissible lag with constant Vmax: 0.3 mm (=300 inc.)
Maximum permissible lag with inconstant Vmax: 0.6 mm (=600 inc.)
Input maximum permissible lag at axis standstill in P1018, Increments".

Then calculate the variable share of the limit curve for the maximum axis speed
using the formula:
Variable share = (300 inc. / 10 m/min) *10 m/min = 300 inc.
Since a lag of, for example, 600 inc. can build up at inconstant speed with this
machine, enter the value 2" in P1019 (P 1019 = max. permissible lag with
inconstant Vmax / variable share). Ensure that the width of the tolerance band
defined in P1019 in this way is dependent on the actual traversing speed! This
means that with an set axis speed of, for example, 1 m/min with otherwise equal
input values, the variable share of the limit curve decreases to 30 increments.
Therefore the path monitor responds at this speed to a lag of 30 inc. * P1019 =
60 inc.
Note on setting:
The value selected for P1019 should not be too large, so that the path monitor can
also respond at high speeds.
The value selected for P1018 should not be too small, so that the path monitor does
not respond immediately at low speeds (owing to the decreasing influence of
P1019).
The following values are sufficient for small test motors with a loop gain factor of 1:
P 1018 = 10 inc. and P 1019 = 1.8 to 2.0.
P 1018 Contour monitoring offset in mm Range of values: 0 − 100000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
See above: Explanations.
P 1019 Contouring monitoring tolerance band

[1.A] 10.000 [2.A] 10.000 [3.A] 10.000 [4.A] 10.000
See above: Explanations.
− 50 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 1020 to P 1022 − Explanations

The dynamic response of the machine tool axes changes when Feedforward
control" is activated (feedforward control parameters: see P1014 to P1017 and
P3012). This means that the normal" parameters for nominal loop gain, slope
acceleration and max. change in feedrate (P1001, P1002 and P1007) are no longer
properly adjusted. Programs with as well as without activated feedforward control
− with the respective optimal axis dynamics parameters − are to be run on the
machine tool. For this reason, parameters P1020 to P1022 are effective with active
feedforward control instead of the normal" parameters (as long as no other
values for an axis have been programmed explicitly using G6 or G14).
P 1020 Slope acceleration for G114 in m/s2 Range of values: −1.000, 0.001 − 99.999
[1.A] −1.000 [2.A] −1.000 [3.A] −1.000 [4.A] −1.000
For function see P1002. If −1 is entered, the corresponding value from P 1002
applies for the axis concerned, even if feedforward control is active.
P 1021 Nominal loop gain factor for G114 in (m/min)/mm Range of values: −1.00, 0.01 − 20.00
[1.A] −1.00 [2.A] −1.00 [3.A] −1.00 [4.A] −1.00
P 1022 Max. change in feedrate for G114 in m/min Range of values: −1.000, 0.000 − 99.999
[1.A] −1.000 [2.A] −1.000 [3.A] −1.000 [4.A] −1.000
P 1023 Axis coupling via user interface: Tolerance in mm Range of values: 0.000 − 99.999
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
The maximum permissible distance in mm between master and slave axes when
linked is set with P1023.
The machine parameter allocates permissible coupling tolerances relative to the
master axis to the individual system axes (designated in the machine parameters
as [1.A]" to max. [8.A]").
The tolerance value is set according to the relevant slave axis. If an axis is used
variably according to coupling status as a master axis and then as a slave axis, a
tolerance value can be entered concerning this axis, although this value will only be
processed by the control unit if the axis is in use as a slave axis during the coupling
run time.
− 51 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Example: 1st and 3rd axes may function as master or slave axes.
P1023 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis
Tolerance value: 2.5 2.5 2.5
1st coupling type: Master Slave Slave
2nd coupling type: Slave Slave Master
The tolerance value of the 1st and 3rd axes is only accepted if these axes are
referenced as slave axes!
There are other possible couplings not listed here which are relevant to this
configuration.
Example: 1st axis is master axis. 2nd axis has no significance for the
coupling and 3rd axis has slave axis functions.
P1023 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis

Tolerance value: 0.0 0.0 2.5
Coupling type: Master no function Slave
The 1st axis is defined as a master axis. The tolerance value of 0.0 for the 1st axis
indicates that slave axis functions are not desired and that normally only this axis
should function as a master axis. The 2nd and 3rd axes can, in principle, function as
master axes, although the one coupling desired here is between the 1st and 3rd
axes.
The slave axis (axes) display on screen can be set in P122.
IMPORTANT
It will not be possible to carry out a permissible coupling if one or more of the
following factors apply:
‘ master axis is not a synchronous axis

‘ the increment size (MP103) of the master and slave axes is unequal
‘ overlapping between first and second axis band
‘ axis coupling with more than one master axis
‘ nondefined slave axes.
‘ coupling of Hirth axes
‘ coupling of a continuous axis, although not all axes involved are
defined as continuous axes.
‘ the IF signal PLC O5.5 (Not)Feed hold" is HIGH.
‘ the IF signal PLC O5.0 Transfer allow" was not set to LOW when the
program was active.
‘ an axis coupling is applied in machine parameter P124 via program
Observe other limitations on software or operation (see Programming and
instruction manual).
If the setpoint exceeds the tolerance value of the coupled axes in an active
coupling, the error message COUPLING TOLERANCE" will be displayed.
If the master axis is parked, it is not possible to check the variation.
− 52 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Refer to the manual Type1 osa / CC220 Signal description" for information on
interface assignment PLC O7.0 to O7.7 and O8.0 to O8.7.
Explanation of axis coupling via interface

‘ An axis coupling via interface remains active if (external) control reset
is carried out.
‘ An axis coupling via interface is no longer active after powerup state,

Clear logic or backup:
No couplings are now active within the NC. If there is still an axis coupling
present in the machine, NC startup must be followed by the PLC sending an
appropriate message.
‘ Referencing when coupled:

After the control unit has been switched on, the current positions must be
updated. This requires a reference process for each individual axis. Under
certain conditions it is necessary for the coupled axes to approach the
reference point together (e.g. coupled tables with a common workpiece).
Example: Referencing when coupled
Axes A and B are coupled. The following cycle has to take place on the PLC
side when referencing is started.
1. In the first part, A is the master axis and B the slave axis.
They approach the reference point of the A axis together.
2. In the second part, B is the master axis and A the slave axis.
They approach the reference point of the B axis together.
3. Referencing is completed.
‘ Software limit switch of the slave axes:
The software limit switches of the slave axes are taken into account in
operating modes:
− Automatic
− Manual Data Input
The software limit switches of the slave axes in the following operating modes
are not taken into account:
− Reference
− Jog mode
− Handwheel mode
− External setpoint input for synchronous axes
− 53 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 1500 Positions
Machine parameters
P 1500 Positions
Conversion rule for rotary axes: 1 mm = 1 degree
P 1501 Reference point position value in mm Range of values: P 1506 − P 1505
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
After traversing to reference point, the relevant value − as defined in P1501 − is

displayed for each axis (preset).
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T: The radius value of the reference point should be entered
for the Xaxis.
P 1502 Reference point offset in mm Range of values: (−20.000) − (+20.000)
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
This parameter evens out the difference between the actual reference point
(mechanical reference point) and the zero reset point (electrical reference
point/zero reference mark).
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T: The offset should be programmed as the radius value for
the X axis.
P 1503 Distance to first reference point (G174) in mm Range of values: (−20.000) − (+20.000)
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
Values in P 1503 define a second reference point.

It is incrementally offset from the first reference point by the individual axis values. If
G174 + intermediate position are programmed, the axes travel to the second
reference point via the intermediate position.
The first reference point can then only be reached with G74.
P 1504 Suppression of software limits (YES/NO)
[1.A] NO [2.A] NO [3.A] NO [4.A] NO
Parameter P 1504 determines the axes for which software limits should be
suppressed.
The software limits are only suppressed when the relevant interface input 12.3 is
highlevel.
P 1505 Software limit positive in mm

Range of values: Type1 osa M / CC 220 M: P1506 to value (see explanation
below)
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T: P 1506 to 20000.000
[1.A] 9999.999 [2.A] 9999.999 [3.A] 9999.999 [4.A] 9999.999
Parameters P 1505 and P 1506 specify the range of the software limits in both
positive and negative directions.
− 54 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 1500 Positions
Machine parameters
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T: The value for the Xaxis must be entered in the radius
measurement.
Type1 osa M / CC 220 M: The range of values of P1505 varies according to the
value given under P103:
P103 Value [mm]

1 9999990.
2 999999.0
3 99999.00
4 20000.000
Example (CC220 M / Type1 osa M):

P103 = 2
Range of values of P1505: P1506 − 999999.0
P 1506 Software limit negative in mm

Range of values: Type1 osa M / CC 220 M: Value up to P 1505
(see explanation below)
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T: (−20000.000) − P 1505
[1.A] −9999.999 [2.A] −9999.999 [3.A] −9999.999 [4.A] −9999.999
Parameters P 1505 and P 1506 specify the range of the software limits in both
positive and negative directions.
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T: The value for the Xaxis must be entered in the radius
measurement.
Type1 osa M / CC 220 M: The range of values varies according to the value
given under P103.
P103 Value [mm]

1 −9999990.
2 −999999.0
3 −99999.00
4 −20000.000
Example (CC220 M / Type1 osa M):

P103 = 2
Range of values of P1505: − 999999.0 − P1506
Example: Software limit ranges

Path of mechanical travel: 180 mm for the Xaxis, 550 mm for the Zaxis.
P 1501 X = 150, Z = 500.
Display after traverse to reference point (no tool active)
X = 300, Z = 500.
S/W travel limits (P 1505) positive are set to X = 160, Z = 520.
S/W travel limits (P 1506) negative are set to X = −10, Z = 50.
This means that the NC will monitor the software travel limits for the Xaxis from
ø −20 mm to ø 320 mm (only Type1 osa T, CC 220 T) and for the Zaxis from
+50 mm to +520 mm.
− 55 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 1500 Positions
Machine parameters
P 1507 Software limit tolerance in mm Range of values: 0.000 − 1.000
[1.A] 0.050 [2.A] 0.050 [3.A] 0.050 [4.A] 0.050
Parameter P 1507 sets a limit on the range within which a mechanical overshoot of
the axes beyond the defined limit position can still be tolerated.
Important for: S/W emergency stop, leadscrew error compensation, spindle
adjustment.
P 1508 Inposition range in mm or degrees Range of values: 0.001 − 32.767
[1.A] 0.010 [2.A] 0.010 [3.A] 0.010 [4.A] 0.010
P 1508 is used to specify the range within which the axes should be positioned after
a sequence of movements. In this way the tolerance band for the positional
accuracy of the axes can be specified.
In Type1 osa, CC220, the InPos logic for G0 is generally effective. This means that
any G0 motion is only terminated if the axes are located in the InPos range. Only
then can a new axis movement be initiated.
The InPos logic for feed movements can be activated by programming G61 (exact
positioning on).
IMPORTANT
‘ The unit of measurement for linear axes is always mm.
‘ For rotary axes, the range should be specified in degrees.
‘ For the spindle, see parameter 7012.
P 1509 Backlash compensation in mm Range of values: 0.000 − 10.000
[1.A] 0.000 [2.A] 0.000 [3.A] 0.000 [4.A] 0.000
If the axes reverse direction, the software can compensate for any difference in
position which may occur between command and position values (occasioned by
mechanical clearance). The amount of compensation for each individual axis
should be specified in P 1509.
IMPORTANT
P1509 is only effective if the leadscrew error compensation function is not active.
P 1510 Referencing necessary (YES/NO)
[1.A] YES [2.A] YES [3.A] YES [4.A] YES
This parameter allows an axis to be operated in AUTOMATIC" or MDI" operating

modes without a reference point.
By entering NO", a program can be selected and started without moving the
relevant axis to the reference point. In this case, not even the software travel
limits for the axis concerned are effective!
In jogging mode, the axes can traverse without a reference point.
− 56 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 1500 Positions
Machine parameters
Grid shift P1511, P1512 and P1513

The grid shift function is not applicable, i.e. P1511, P1512 and P1513
have no function.
P 1511 Grid shift in pulses (electronic reference point offset) (no function!)
P 1512 Grid shift activation (YES/NO) (no function!)
P 1513 Grid shift pulseedge evaluation (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) (no function!)
P 1514 Distancecoded measuring system (0=off, 1=encoder, 2=linear) Range of values: 0, 1, 2
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
Possible inputs: 0 = no distancecoded measuring system

1 = distancecoded rotary encoder
2 = distancecoded linear scale or distance
coded angular position measuring system
(for rotary axes)
IMPORTANT
A distancecoded angular position measuring system corresponds to a distance
coded linear scale related to axis revolutions (e.g. for rotary axes).
In addition to parameters P 1514 to P 1517, parameters P 104, P 105, P 115, P 116
and P 502 must be properly defined so that the system can determine absolute
machine positions after a reset, CLEAR LOGIC or after switching on.
If values 1" or 2" are entered for an axis in P 1514, a value <>0 must be entered
for this axis in P 104.
IMPORTANT
− Software and hardware limits must lie within the travel range of the distance
coded measuring system. It is not possible for this range to be left
mechanically!
− The travel path of the approach cycle for determining positions must lie within
the software limit!
− If a control reset is carried out during the approach cycle, the system does
not determine a machine position!
− A distance coded measuring system (e.g. Stegmann rotary encoder TE 60.
linear scale LIP 101A or Heidenhain angular position measuring system ROD
250C) can only be used in conjunction with SERVO i.
− Distancecoded measuring systems may not be applied to spindles or when
using normal servo cards (e.g. SERVO 8).
− For rotary axes with distancecoded measuring systems a reference point
approach may be initiated, always within one revolution maximum.
− 57 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 1500 Positions
Machine parameters
P 1515 Number of cyclic reference marks (for encoder revolutions) Range of values: 0 − 99999
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
The number of cyclic reference marks in relation to the maximum measuring range
(travel path) of the distancecoded encoder should be entered here:
P1515 = measuring range / distance between cyclic reference marks.
Cyclic reference marks" refers to marks output from the encoder according to a
constant number of lines (pulses). For a rotary encoder, this mark is output after
exactly every revolution.
P 1516 Offset of measuring system in mm Range of values: 99999.999 to 99999.999:
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
Here the difference between the encoder position and the machine position should
be entered in mm for each axis.
Determining the offset during commissioning:
− Enter parameters P 1514, P 1515, P 1517, P 104, P 105, P 115, P 116 and
P 502 correctly.
− Ensure that the software limit lies outside the encoder range during
commissioning of rotary encoders in order to maintain the unaffected
absolute encoder position. The software limit must lie within the encoder
travel range during commissioning of linear scales and angular position
measuring systems.
− Enter the temporary value 0" in P 1516 and transfer the machine
parameters.
− Using the REFERENCE POINT softkey, start the cycle to determine the
machine position in group operating mode MACHINE. The manual Interface
conditions, part 2" contains a detailed description of this cycle.
− Then traverse the corresponding axis to a known machine position (e.g.
machine zero point) using the jog keys.
− The offset value now to be input in P 1516 is derived from:
P 1516 = desired position − displayed position.
− Now set the software limits so that they lie within the travel range corrected
by the offset!
− Transfer the machine parameters and, using the REFERENCE POINT
softkey, restart the cycle to determine the machine position in group
operating mode MACHINE.
This ends commissioning of an axis with a distancecoded measuring system, and
displays the desired machine position.
P 1517 Step size of coded markers in encoder pulses Range of values: 1 to 8000
[1.A] 1 [2.A] 1 [3.A] 1 [4.A] 1
Enter here in pulses the step size of the coded reference marks, i.e. the distance
change between cyclic and coded reference marks per revolution (for rotary
encoder) or per section (for linear scale or angular position measuring system)
(step size in P 104 units!).
IMPORTANT
If P 1514 is not stored with value 0", the input value in P 1517 must be less than or
equal to P 104.
− 58 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 2000 Auxiliary functions
Machine parameters

NOTE
Changing parameters P2001, P2002 and P2004. All link tables are deleted when
the machine parameters are activated!
P 2001 Auxiliary function address (−: means not defined")

[1.] M [2.] − [3.] T
Parameter 2001 specifies the necessary auxiliary functions.
The order of output is the same as the order of input.
Can be expanded to include up to 6 auxiliary functions (optional at extra cost).
The following addresses are valid, if they are not already defined in P 102: A−C, E,
M, O, S−Z. If an invalid address is entered, the error message INVALID VALUE"
appears. Where several auxiliary functions are output, the logic always outputs the
T word first of all.
The auxiliary functions defined in P2001 can each be assigned an NC subprogram
in P4022.
IMPORTANT
The M auxiliary function should always be specified.
Special case for S" address:
If the S word is to be passed on internally to the PLC as both spindle speed function
and auxiliary function, P 2007 should match parameter P 9019.
P 2002 Output with transfer stop (YES/NO)

[1.] NO [2.] NO [3.] NO
Entering YES means feed stop, including lag time T2 (see P 2009).
As long as the strobe signal is present at the interface, the programmed axis
motions in the corresponding block will not be executed.
The start of processing of the active block can be delayed still further by transfer
allow/feed enable.
P 2003 Delete data after output (YES/NO)

[−] NO
If YES is entered, the data present at the interface is deleted (see P 2009) after the
watchdog has run (T1 + P 2008 + T2).
If NO" is entered, the data present at the interface is not deleted, i.e. data output
takes place with handshake.
Parameter P 2008 is large enough to select.
T1 T2
Data
P 2008
Strobe (modification signal)
Prerun/overrun T1 T2
P 2009 P 2009
− 59 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 2004 Output encoded in BINARY or BCD (BIN/BCD)
[1.] BCD [2.] BCD [3.] BCD
This parameter specifies the format in which the auxiliary functions are output at the
interface.
Pay attention to parameter P 2005! REAL" in P 2005 enforces BCD" in P 2004. The
auxiliary function output of negative values in BCD format is not possible. BCD
does not recognise signs!
P 2005 Binary: Data type (INTEGER/REAL)
[1.] INTEGER [2.] INTEGER [3.] INTEGER
If you need to program auxiliary functions with post decimal positions, then REAL"
data type must be agreed. The output from the interface will then be in formatted
BCD code.
P 2006 BINARY: Data format (8, 16, 32) bit
[1.] 32 [2.] 32 [3.] 32
Parameter P 2006 specifies the data format of the auxiliary functions.
Auxiliary function <

=2digit, input 8 or 16 or 32
<
Auxiliary function =4digit, input 16 or 32
Auxiliary function > 4digit, input 32
IMPORTANT
CC 220 T requires 4digit data format.
P 2007 BCD: Data format before and after decimal point
[1.] 80 [2.] 40 [3.] 80
This parameter specifies the BCD data format for the display and the decimal
places of the auxiliary functions. Pay attention to group 9000.
Example:
40 means 4 integer digits, 0 postdecimal positions
IMPORTANT
First digit must be > 0 and second digit must be < 9; the sum total of all the digits
must not exceed 9 (e.g. 55 is illegal!).
− 60 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 2008 Response signal time in ms Range of values: 1 − 32767

[1.] 100 [2.] 100 [3.] 100
P 2008 determines the time during which the auxiliary function response signal is
active at the interface.
The transmission time (data length) of an auxiliary function can be calculated by
P 2008 + T1 + T2 (see P 2009).
P 2009 Response signal prerun and lag time in ms Range of values: P 9901−500
[T1] 50 [T2] 50
T1 and T2 define the prerun time and lag time in ms for outputting an auxiliary
function (see diagram with P 2003).
IMPORTANT
The times are stored internally in wholenumber multiples of P 9901, i.e. T1 and T2
should not be less than P 9901.
P 2010 Auxiliary function output go block" Range of values: 0, 1, 2

[−] 1
This parameter determines whether auxiliary functions should be output before a
go block.
0: All auxiliary functions are output.
1: No auxiliary function is output.
2: The lastprogrammed auxiliary function at all the addresses defined
in P 2001 is output.
If P 2010 is used, this will affect parameters P 6512 and P 6513.
P 2011 Auxiliary function strobe position Range of values: 1 − 6

[1.] 3 [2.] 1 [3.] 2 [4.] 4
[5.] 5 [6.] 6
Auxiliary and switching functions (M, T etc.) and CPL data can be output to the PLC
via the multiple output of the NC. Parameter P 2011 determines the assignment of
the 6 auxiliary function strobes to the interface outputs O 7.0 to
O 7.5 (cf. P 2001). Values 1 − 6 correspond to these outputs. Output O 7.6 is
reserved, O 7.7 assigned to the CPL strobe. In the example, the T strobe is
assigned to output O 7.2 (3 =7.2).
IMPORTANT
The values in the individual positions must be different, since only one output can
be allocated to one strobe.
P 2012 Onthefly output of auxiliary function (YES/NO)
[1.] NO [2.] NO [3.] NO

optional: [4.] NO [5.] NO [6.] NO
If the auxiliary function output is defined as onthefly, then the current block and
subsequent NC blocks can be prepared and processed by the control while
transfer of the auxiliary function to the PLC is still taking place. If output is not
onthefly, the subsequent NC block may only be processed when auxiliary
function output is completed.
− 61 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
Auxiliary functions with transfer stop (P 2002 = YES) cannot be output onthefly.
The M auxiliary functions can, with the exception of the following, also be output
onthefly:
− End of program: M2, M30
− Program stop: M0, M1
− Spindle M functions: M3, M4, M5, M19, M40−M48
Should a number of axiliary functions be programmed in one block (onthefly only,

onthefly, normal), the onthefly output can only be carried when the onthefly
auxiliary function is in last place in the order of output.
If application bit 44 (6 auxiliary functions) is set, then there will now be 6 auxiliary
functions available for ONTHEFLY OUTPUT OF AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS instead
of 3.
− 62 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 2500 Potentiometers
Machine parameters
The following potentiometer inputs are available according to the control unit type:
Number of potentiometer inputs CC 220 Type1 osa

absolute 3 4
incremental 2 −
The following applies:
Potentiometer evaluation CC 220 Type1 osa

absolute evaluation Pot. 1−3 Pot. 1−4
incremental evaluation Pot. 5−6 −
It is not possible to connect analog handwheels or analog potentiometers to the

Type1 osa.
If an analog handwheel has been connected, the 6th potentiometer input is

reserved for the handwheel (only CC220).
Of the 5 (CC 220 M) or 4 (Type1 osa M) available inputs, a maximum of 3 (or
4 inputs with handwheel connected) can be used at any one time. Simultaneous
use of absolute or incremental inputs is permissible (only CC220!). The allocation
of potentiometer numbers to functions (rapid motion, feed, leadscrew etc.) can be
random.
If feedrate and rapid motion are both being controlled by a common potentiometer
(for feedrate and rapid motion combined, see P 2501), you can also switch
between two potentiometer groups by means of an interface signal (internal/exter
nal).
BEMERKUNG
‘ Where a word coupling is present, all potentiometers can be looped with
PC 600 (CC 220 M only) and looped together via the PLC (see P 6003).
‘ If feedrate and rapid traverse are affected by a common potentiometer, care

should be taken to ensure that during an AUTOMATIC" operation in pro
gram test" mode (TEST ON" active), rapid feed can only be affected by this
potentiometer if the TEST RAPID FEED soft key is in reverse video.
− 63 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Examples of potentiometer configurations:
Example 1 Example 2
Poti 1 Feedrate + Rapid (internal) Feedrate (internal)
Poti 2 Spindle (internal) Spindle (internal)
Poti 3 Feedrate + Rapid (external) Rapid (internal)
Poti 4
Poti 5
Poti 6 Handwheel (if applied) Handwheel (if applied)
Example 3 Example 4
Poti 1 Feedrate (internal)
Poti 2 Spindle (internal)
Poti 3 Rapid (internal)
Poti 4 Handwheel (incremental)
Poti 5 Feedrate + Rapid (internal)
Poti 6 Spindle (internal)
Internal = potentiometer on operating panel

External = second potentiometer
Type1 osa: potentiometer 1−4
CC220 : potentiometer 1−6
IMPORTANT
‘ With the optional digital handwheel" software upgrade, a digital handwheel
can be connected to input X73 of the MTB1 I/O or via a measuring system
input of the Servo i card − S/W versions Z25FJ and D25SA onwards or via a
measuring system input of the Type1 osa module − (see Connection condi
tions Type1 osa / CC 220").
P 2501 Potentiometer for high speed traverse combined with feedrate (YES/NO)
[−] YES
If it is required that high speed traverse and feedrate may be changed by means of
a shared potentiometer, then YES" should be entered.
The definition of P 2501 affects P 2502 and P 2507.
P 2502 External feed and spindle potentiometer (only in combination with highspeed traverse)
(YES/NO)
[SPD] NO [SPI] NO [SP2] NO
The [SPD] parameter should only be set to YES" if the high−speed traverse
potentiometer is combined with the feedrate potentiometer (parameter P 2501
YES").
If the feedrate and highspeed traverse potentiometers are operating separately, a

switchover to an external potentiometer is not possible.
[SPD] = Feedrate [SPI] = Spindle [SP2] = 2nd spindle
− 64 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 2503 External feed potentiometer (input no., min %, max %, rev/range, interface)
[NO.] 0 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NO
If [SPD] is set to YES in P2502, the external feed potentiometer can be defined.
The following should be used:
[NO.] Potentiometer no. (0 = no potentiometer connected);

CC 220: 1 − 3: absolute, 5 − 6: incremental
Type1 osa: 1 − 4: absolute
Entering 1" is equivalent to input IN 0, 2" is equivalent to input IN 1, etc.
[MIN] and [MAX] specify the effective range of the potentiometer.
[MIN] Minimum percentage, 0 <

−MIN < MAX
[MAX] Maximum percentage, MIN < MAX <

−999
[R] In the case of incrementally evaluated potentiometers, it may be neces
sary for the potentiometer to rotate several times in order to cover the entire
potentiometer range. The number of revolutions required is specified here:
(0.5 < R < 9.99; values greater than 1 are only meaningful in the case of
incremental potentiometers).
[IF] If NO" is entered, the potentiometer data must be transmitted from the op
erating panel to the CC220 logic component.
If YES" is input, an alternative control option is available via the digital
CNC interface (mandatory with Type1 osa).
The potentiometers must then be connected to the PLC (by digital or ana
log interfaces). The PLC requests the data, evaluates it and transfers it in
digital form over the multiple interface to the CNC (not possible in the case
of CC 220 M PC 600 word coupling).
P 2504 External spindle potentiometer

[NO.] 0 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NO
An external spindle potentiometer can only be defined if P 2502 [SPI] was set to
YES".
P 2505 Internal feed potentiometer

[NO.] 1 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NEIN
The [IF] parameter must be set to NO.
P 2506 Internal spindle potentiometer

[NO.] 2 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NEIN
The [IF] parameter must be set to NO".
− 65 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 2507 Internal highspeed potentiometer (only if not combined with highspeed operation)
[NO.] 0 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NO
The internal highspeed potentiometer can only be specified separately if

P 2501 is set to NO". The [IF] parameter must be set to NO.
P 2508 Feed test" (min/max % value) Range of values: 0 − 999

[MIN] 0 [MAX] 100
A second, extended potentiometer range can be defined exclusively for program
testing (TEST ON active). The limits of the range are described as minimum and
maximum % values. Pressing the TEST ON" softkey twice in Automatic"
operating mode causes the soft key POT.RANGE" to appear. This activates the
limits defined in this parameter.
P 2509 to P 2511
IMPORTANT
Parameters P 2509 to P 2511 affect the 2nd spindle of the CC220T or the Type1 osa
T.
P 2509 Joint potentiometer for first and second spindle (YES/NO)

[−] YES
P 2510 External potentiometer for 2nd spindle

[NO.] 0 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NO
Precondition: P 2502 [SPI] parameterised with YES".
P 2511 Internal potentiometer for 2nd spindle

[NO.] 0 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.00
[IF] NO
P 2512 Internal and external feedrate potentiometer linked (YES/NO)

[−] NO
Two incremental potentiometers (5 and 6) can be coupled in such a way that both
are simultaneously active and mutually additively effective. The feedrate can be
influenced from various locations using a potentiometer without switching the
potentiometer. One potentiometer must be defined as internal and one as external.
This removes the need for the Potentiometer switch via interface" function.
In addition, the set feedrate value can be set to 100% of the feedrate via interface
signal PLC O21.1 and the set rapid value can be set to 100% of the rapid feedrate
via PLC O21.2. Once the IF signal has been recalled, the old potentiometer values
become effective again.
− 66 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
The following settings need to be made in the machine parameters in order to
activate potentiometer linking:
− Parameter P2512 is set to YES.

− Parameter P 2501 is assigned with YES, as a separate rapid potentiometer
cannot be used as an external potentiometer.
− Parameter P 2502 [SPD] is assigned with YES in order to define an external
feedrate potentiometer.
− An internal and an external potentiometer need to be configured in parameters
P2503 and P2505 (5 and 6: incremental potentiometers).
P 2513 Potentiometer for analog outputs

[NO.] 0 [MIN] 0 [MAX] 100 [R] 1.0
[IF] NO [AX] 0
P 2513 permits the assignment of a potentiometer to analog outputs designated

with axis type analog" in parameter P107. The meaning of parameters [ND],
[MIN], [MAX], [R] and [IF] corresponds to the description of parameter P2503.
Axis numbers of analog outputs for which the potentiometer is effective are entered
in [AX]. Only the digits 0−8 (5) are permitted in [AX].
Parameter Permissible axis number for

CC 220 Type1 osa
[AX] 1,...8 1,...5
Example:
The 5th, 6th and 7th axes were designated with axis type analog" in P107.
If the potentiometer is intended to be effective for the 5th, 6th and 7th analog
outputs, the values 567 and 3 must be entered in [AX] and [NO] respectively.
If the potentiometer is intended only to be effective for the 7th analog output, the
value 7 must be entered in [AX].
IMPORTANT
This parameter only applies to CC 220M and Type1 osa M.
− 67 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 3000 Powerup state
Machine parameters
NOTE
The parameters in group 3000 specify the powerup state of the control unit and are
applicationdependent (turning: Type1 osa T, CC 220 T; milling: Type1 osa M / CC
220 M).
The necessary G codes are entered without G letters.
P 3001 Interpolation (G00/G01)

[−] 1 Feed includes linear interpolation
P 3002 Inch/metric programming (G70/G71)

[−] 71 Metric programming
P 3003 Absolute/incremental programming (G90/G91)

[−] 90 Absolute dimension input
P 3004 Set feed to 100 % (G63/G66)

[−] 66 Delete set feed to 100 %"
P 3005 Feedrate programming (G94/G95)

[−] 94 Feedrate in mm/min
P 3006 Plane selection (G17/G18/G19)

[−] 17 XY plane
Type1 osa T, CC 220 T; G18 should be entered for rotary operation in the
XZ plane.
P 3007 Path slope ON/OFF (G08/G09/G108/G109/G110)

[−] 9 Path slope OFF
P 3008 In position programming (G61/G62)

[−] 62 Exact positioning OFF
P 3009 Feedrate override ON/OFF (G64/G65)

[−] 65 Feedrate compensation OFF
P 3010 Outside corner as a radius or intersection (G68/G69)

[−] 68 Outside corner as a radius
− 68 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 3011 Tool table compensation ON/OFF (G145...G845/G146)

[−] 146 Tool table compensation OFF
P 3012 Feedforward control (G114/G115)

[−] 115 Feedforward control OFF
P 3013 External zero shift ON/OFF (G160/G167)

[−] 167 External zero shift OFF
P 3014 Workpiece zero shift ON/OFF (G51/G52)

[−] 51 Workpiece zero shift off
Type1 osa T, CC 220T: This parameter has no effect on turning. Do not change
inputs.
P 3015 Exact positioning for G0 ON/OFF (G161/G162)

[−] 161 Exact positioning for G0 on
G0 rapid is used for quick positioning of machining axes. Normal positioning with
G0 ends with an exact positioning" (always powerup state). Function G161/G162
switches G0 selectively with or without exact positioning":
G161 Exact positioning function for G0 is switched on

G162 Exact positioning function for G0 is switched off
− 69 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 3500 Color settings
Machine parameters
P 3500 Colour settings

The parameter only applies to control systems equipped with a colour panel
(CC 220) or a flat display (Type1 osa). Here the colours in the different screen areas
can be specifically reset. The following colours may be input: BLACK, RED,
GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE, VIOLET, LIGHT BLUE, WHITE.
IMPORTANT
Enter different colour values for foreground and background. The settings entered
here are recommended values to provide a high degree of contrast and must be
made by the user according to the lighting conditions.
Applies only to Type1 osa display: If the background [BCK] in P3501 is set in
WHITE" or LIGHT BLUE", the picture will be displayed in Type1 osa layout. If
BLACK [BCK] is selected, the picture receives the CC220 layout.
[FOR] = Foreground [BCK] = Background
P 3501 Colour AREA" (foreground and background)

CC 220 14" colour: [FOR] YELLOW [BCK] BLACK
Type1 osa display colour: [FOR] BLACK [BCK] WHITE
P 3502 Colour SOFTKEY"

CC 220 14" colour: [FOR] LIGHT BLUE [BCK] BLACK
Type1 osa display colour: [FOR] YELLOW [BCK] BLUE
P 3503 Colour ERRORS"

CC 220 14" colour: [FOR] RED [BCK] BLACK
Type1 osa display colour: [FOR] YELLOW [BCK] RED
P 3504 Colour MESSAGE"

CC 220 14" colour: [FOR] GREEN [BCK] BLACK
Type1 osa display colour: [FOR] BLACK [BCK] GREEN
P 3503/3603
NO BF0 NC0 DATA I/O
PROGRAM ACT WAITING 24. 3 15:25 P 3501/3601
NUMBER NAME OF PROGRAM LENGTH ACCESS P 3504/3604
P 3501/3601
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION P 3504/3604

EDIT LOAD
DIRECT
OUTPUT MANAGE
P 3502/3602
SETUP
− 70 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 3600 Graysclae setting
Machine parameters
P 3600 Greyscale settings

Parameters P3601 to P3604 are relevant for control systems equipped with a 12"
CC 220 monochrome panel (greyscale screen display) or with a Type1 osa dis
play (monochrome). Levels of grey for the different areas of the screen can be spe
cifically defined. 8 greyscale values are available (0 to 7).
Dark (black) = 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Light (white) = 7
[FOR] Foreground [BCK] Background
IMPORTANT
Enter different greyscale values for foreground and background. The settings en
tered here are recommended values to provide a high degree of contrast and must
be made by the user according to the lighting conditions.
Applies only to Type1 osa display: If the background [BCK] in P3601 is set in grey
scale level 7 (monochrome), the picture will be displayed in Type1 osa layout. Se
lecting grey scale level 0 [BCK] results in the CC 220 layout for the picture.
P 3601 Grey scale AREA" (foreground and background)

CC 220 12" monochrome: [FOR] 0 [BCK] 7
Type1 osa display monochrome: [FOR] 7 [BCK] 0
P 3602 Grey scale SOFTKEY"

P 3603 Grey scale ERROR"

P 3604 Grey scale MESSAGE"

− 71 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 4000 CPL parameters
Machine parameters
NOTE
Changing the parameters P4001 to P4009 and 4014, 4015 and 4016, 4019 and
4020. All nonpermanent link tables are deleted when the machine parameters are
transferred!
P 4001 Userdefined G functions (P numbers) Range of values: 1 − 999999998
[ 1.] 999999081 [ 2.] 999999082 [ 3.] 999999083 [4.] 999999084

[ 5.] 999999085 [ 6.] 999999086 [ 7.] 0 [8.] 0
[ 9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
[17.] 0 [18.] 0 [19.] 0 [20.] 0
[21.] 0 [22.] 0 [23.] 0 [24.] 0
[25.] 0 [26.] 0 [27.] 0 [28.] 0
[29.] 0 [30.] 0 [31.] 0 [32.] 0
[33.] 0 [34.] 0 [35.] 0 [36.] 0
[37.] 0 [38.] 0 [39.] 0 [40.] 0
Programs entered here can be started with the G codes specified in P 4002.
IMPORTANT
A permanent link table can be created for all programs defined in P4001 using
softkeys CREATE LINK TABLE and ALL PROGRAMS in operating mode
AUTOMATIC. Note also parameter 4018!
P 4002 Userdefined G functions (G code) Range of values: All G codes which are
not NCresident (max. 3 digits)
[ 1.] 81 [ 2.] 82 [ 3.] 83 [ 4.] 84

[ 5.] 85 [ 6.] 86 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
[ 9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
[17.] 0 [18.] 0 [19.] 0 [20.] 0
[21.] 0 [22.] 0 [23.] 0 [24.] 0
[25.] 0 [26.] 0 [27.] 0 [28.] 0
[29.] 0 [30.] 0 [31.] 0 [32.] 0
[33.] 0 [34.] 0 [35.] 0 [36.] 0
[37.] 0 [38.] 0 [39.] 0 [40.] 0
In parameters P 4001 and P 4002, the G code is allocated to the specified

P number. If G81 is called, for example, program P 999999081 is therefore
automatically activated.
IMPORTANT
If a G code is entered which is already NCresident, (e.g. G1, G5, G92 etc.)
the control executes the internal function only, rather than the program allocated in
P 4001.
− 72 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 4003 Userdefined G functions (number of parameters) Range of values: 0 − 99
[ 1.] 5 [ 2.] 5 [ 3.] 7 [ 4.] 5

[ 5.] 5 [ 6.] 5 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
[ 9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
[17.] 0 [18.] 0 [19.] 0 [20.] 0
[21.] 0 [22.] 0 [23.] 0 [24.] 0
[25.] 0 [26.] 0 [27.] 0 [28.] 0
[29.] 0 [30.] 0 [31.] 0 [32.] 0
[33.] 0 [34.] 0 [35.] 0 [36.] 0
[37.] 0 [38.] 0 [39.] 0 [40.] 0
This parameter specifies how many variables per G function can be used as
modally functioning transfer parameters for G functions defined as modal
(see P4004). The corresponding memory location for variables is then reserved.
P 4004 Userdefined G functions (modal) (YES/NO)
[ 1.] YES [ 2.] YES [ 3.] YES [ 4.] YES

[ 5.] YES [ 6.] YES [ 7.] NO [ 8.] NO
[ 9.] NO [10.] NO [11.] NO [12.] NO
[13.] NO [14.] NO [15.] NO [16.] NO
[17.] NO [18.] NO [19.] NO [20.] NO
[21.] NO [22.] NO [23.] NO [24.] NO
[25.] NO [26.] NO [27.] NO [28.] NO
[29.] NO [30.] NO [31.] NO [32.] NO
[[33.] NO [34.] NO [35.] NO [36.] NO
[37.] NO [38.] NO [39.] NO [40.] NO
If it is intended that the userdefined G codes should work modally, YES" should
be entered at the appropriate location. Modal means that the program called by the
relevant G function is called by axis address and executed after every NC block.
Modal operation can be cancelled by G80.
P 4005 Userdefined M functions (P numbers) Range of values: 1 − 999999998
[ 1.] 6 [ 2.] 0 [ 3.] 0 [ 4.] 0

[ 5.] 0 [ 6.] 0 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
[ 9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
IMPORTANT
− 73 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 4006 Userdefined M functions (M code) Range of values: all M functions which are not used
in the NC (3digit)
[ 1.] 6 [ 2.] 0 [ 3.] 0 [ 4.] 0

[ 5.] 0 [ 6.] 0 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
[ 9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
In parameters P 4005 and P 4006, the M code is allocated to the specified P

number.
Example:
If M6" is programmed, program P 6 is automatically activated.
P 4007 Userdefined auxiliary function address
[ 1.] −
Entry: all unassigned addresses (A − Z). The input address must be defined as an
auxiliary function in P 2001. The type of auxiliary function is defined in P9000.
Together with the aux. funct. codes from P 4009, an auxiliary function can thus be
indexed".
P 4008 Userdefined ranges of values (P numbers): 1 − 999999998
[ 1.] 0 [ 2.] 0 [ 3.] 0 [ 4.] 0

[ 5.] 0 [ 6.] 0 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
Programs started by means of a userdefined auxiliary function do not output M30

or M02 to the interface.
IMPORTANT
P 4009 Userdefined auxiliary functions (aux. funct. code) Range of values: dependent on defined
number of digits
[ 1.] 0 [ 2.] 0 [ 3.] 0 [ 4.] 0

[ 5.] 0 [ 6.] 0 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
Other auxiliary functions can be defined, which, like G codes and M codes, can be
allocated to specific program numbers (P 4008).
In P 4007 for example, E" is defined as an address. Using P 4009 this address can
be indexed" with a maximum of 8 numbers. This means that it is possible for the
user to call in up to 8 additional programs via one single auxiliary function address
(e.g. E 100 − E 107).
P 4010 Range of write authorisation for interface Range of values: 232 − 255
[MIN] 232 [MAX] 255
It is possible for the user to set and reset direct outputs using CPL.
The interface range from bit 232 to bit 255 is unlocked. This range can be limited still
further by P 4010.
− 74 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 4011 Program numbers in the main dialog menu Range of values: 1 − 999999998
[EDT] 999999000 [MAC] 999999001 [DIA] 999999002 [COR] 999999003

[GRF] 999999000
Programs specified in machine parameter P 4011 can be activated by actuating the

softkeys PARAMETER IN DIALOG, CPL/DIALOG CALL or by a cycle call" in the
following modes of operation: memory [EDT], machine [MAC], diagnosis [DIA],
compensation [COR] and graphics [GRA].
These programs can in turn call in other subprograms, thereby giving the user
access to additional versatile soft key applications, e.g. drilling, milling or
measuring cycles.
IMPORTANT
P 4012 CPL strobe for data output to interface in ms Range of values: P 9901 − 32767
[−] 100
Parameter 4012 specifies the duration of the CPL response signal in ms.
Using CPL, data can be passed on to the PCL at the NC interface multiple output.
For such an exchange of data to take place, a response signal must be output
simultaneously (O 7.7). See also P 2011 and P 2003 (diagram).
P 4013 Reset range at interface when control reset is activated Range of values: 232 − 255
[MIN] 248 [MAX] 255
The interface range specified here can also be reset by means of the CONTROL
RESET" softkey in DIAGNOSTIC" group operating mode, or by means of an
EXTERNAL CONTROL RESET". See also P 4010.
P 4014 Subroutine for go block / reentry Range of values: 0 − 999999999
[−] 0
After selecting a program, it is possible to reenter the interrupted program at any

point, even at the start or finish point of the breakpoint, using the GO BLOCK"
soft key.
Now operator prompting can be used to enter a program. Before program
execution begins at the specified point, a CPL/NC program defined in P 4014 is
executed.
For this purpose an M function to which a tool change call has been allocated
(P 4015) must be programmed in the part program.
If the program contains no M function defined in P 4015, it should be ensured that

the subprogram entered in P 4014 is linked during the linking run.
− 75 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
This is achieved by programming a sub−program, which is, however, never

executed.
Example:
.
50 A? = TRUE
60 IF A? = TRUE THEN
70 GOTO .MARK1
80 ENDIF
N90 Pxxx (program number defined in P 4014)
100 .MARK1
.
During the block search, a series of data is stored which can then be queried and
evaluated using the CPL/NC program defined in P 4014.
IMPORTANT
Machine parameters P 6512 and P 6513 have no effect on auxiliary function output
if a subprogram is entered in P 4014. The IF signal DRY RUN TO BLOCK WITHOUT
COMPENSATION is output in the first computing run, as the computing run is
performed without corrective calculation.
For subsequent computing runs, this signal is then set to Low, as these runs
include corrective calculation.
The *WITHOUT TOOL CORR." softkey is not supplied.
P 4015 M function for changing tools during block start / reentry Range of values: 0 − 999
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0

[5.] 0
(see P 4014).
P 4016 Program number of direct call Range of values: 0 − 999999999
[−] 0
The NC/CPL program entered here can be selected in group operating mode MDI
via softkey DIRECT CALL or by using interface signal O 6.1. The start is then carried
out via NC START.
If the value 0 is entered here, the softkey level DIRECT CALL does not appear in
group operating mode MDI.
IMPORTANT
− 76 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 4017 Machine parameters for customer software Range of values: −999 999 999 to 999 999 999
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0

[5.] 0 [6.] 0 [7.] 0 [8.] 0
[9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
[17.] 0 [18.] 0 [19.] 0 [20.] 0
[21.] 0 [22.] 0 [23.] 0 [24.] 0
[25.] 0 [26.] 0 [27.] 0 [28.] 0
[29.] 0 [30.] 0 [31.] 0 [32.] 0
[33.] 0 [34.] 0 [35.] 0 [36.] 0
[37.] 0 [38.] 0 [39.] 0 [40.] 0
[41.] 0 [42.] 0 [43.] 0 [44.] 0
[45.] 0 [46.] 0 [47.] 0 [48.] 0
[49.] 0 [50.] 0 [51.] 0 [52.] 0
[53.] 0 [54.] 0 [55.] 0 [56.] 0
[57.] 0 [58.] 0 [59.] 0 [60.] 0
[61.] 0 [62.] 0 [63.] 0 [64.] 0
[65.] 0 [66.] 0 [67.] 0 [68.] 0
[69.] 0 [70.] 0 [71.] 0 [72.] 0
[73.] 0 [74.] 0 [75.] 0 [76.] 0
[77.] 0 [78.] 0 [79.] 0 [80.] 0
Using the CPL command SD(22,<Index>)" accessed by reading (<Index>=

number of integer value).
In this way, for example, special configuration data input by the MTM can be
evaluated via CPL program.
For word coupling between CNC and PLC, these machine parameters are stored in
the CS memory and may be manipulated via the corresponding PLC modules.
P 4018 Link list program number Range of values: 0 to 999 999 999
[−] 0
After switching on the control, after a hardware reset, after CLEAR LOGIC (softkey)
or after CREATE LINK TABLE −> ALL PROGRAMS (softkey), linking of all
programs defined in the machine parameters is normally started automatically.
The control creates permanent link tables for all programs defined in P4001,
P4005, P4008, P4011, P4014, P4016 and P4019.
In addition, a link list" can now be accessed in which other programs to be linked
can be entered. It is also possible to determine whether programs defined in
machine parameters P4001, P4005, P4008, P4011, P4014, P4016 and P4019
should be linked or not, by means of an entry in the link list.
Determine the program numbers of this link list with P 4018. Entering 0" means: do
not use a link list.
− 77 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
The contents of the link list file must show the following syntax:
$LINK or $NOLI The first line must contain

one of these two identifiers!
Pxxxxxxxxx The program files to be linked can be
Pxxxxxxxxx entered from the 2nd line onwards.
.
The identifiers $LINK" and $NOLI" have the following meaning in the first line:
$LINK After the programs entered in the link list have been linked, the
programs defined in the machine parameters P4001, P4005,
P4008, P4011, P4014, P4016 and P4019 are also linked.
$NOLI After the programs entered in the link list have been linked, the
programs defined in the machine parameters P4001, P4005,
P4008, P4011, P4014, P4016 and P4019 are not linked.
IMPORTANT
CONTROL RESET or CLEAR LOGIC during linking aborts the linking process.
P 4019 16 additional M functions (P numbers) Range of values: 1 − 999 999 998

16 further userdefined M functions are available in addition to those defined in
parameter P4005. As in parameter 4005, P numbers are allocated to these M
functions.
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0
[5.] 0 [6.] 0 [7.] 0 [8.] 0
[9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
IMPORTANT
All 16 parameters in P4005 must be stored contiguously before selecting the
userdefined M functions. M functions may only be defined in P 4019 when these
have been completely stored.
AUTOMATIC. Note also parameter 4018.
P 4020 16 additional M functions (M codes) Range of values: 0 − 999

16 further userdefined M functions are available in addition to those defined in
parameter P4006. As in parameter 4006, M functions are assigned to these
P numbers.
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0
[5.] 0 [6.] 0 [7.] 0 [8.] 0
[9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
− 78 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
All 16 parameters in P4006 must be stored contiguously before selecting the
userdefined M functions. M functions may only be defined in P 4020 when these
have been completely stored.
AUTOMATIC (note also parameter 4018).
P 4021 CPL interpreter mode Range of values: 0,1
[−] * * *
Example entry: P4021 [−] 010
Various CPL behaviour can be defined using parameter P4021, if the page back
key is pressed within a dialog loop (DLG/ENDDLG).
P4021 * * 0/1 0 = If the page back key is pressed during a DLG loop,
the NC leaves the DLG loop and switches to NC
mode.
1= If the page back key is pressed during a DLG loop,
the NC leaves the DLG loop and the CPL program
continues.
Important:
The INKEY command can be used before an INP
instruction to ask whether the page back key was
pressed during a DLF loop. If the page back key is
recognised (key code 139, see CPL instruction
manual), the reaction to the page back key can be
controlled by means of a GOTO command.
If there is no programmed reaction to the page back
key, the CPL program is continued with the next INP
command of the DLG loop.
P4021 * 0/1 * 0 = In CPL dialog with a CPL command the

NC does not switch to NC mode.
1= In CPL dialog with a CPL command the
NC switches to NC mode.
P4021 0/1 * * 0 = If the page back key is pressed during an SFK

command, the NC switches to NC mode.
1= If the page back key is pressed during an SFK
command, the NC does not switch to NC mode.
− 79 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 4022 Subprog. for simple auxiliary functions (P numbers) Range of values: 0 − 999999998
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0 [5.] 0 [6.] 0
Each auxiliary function defined in P2001 can be assigned an NC subprogram in

P4022.
This only applies if these auxiliary functions have not already been assigned NC
subprograms in machine parameters P4005 to P4009 and P4019 to P4020.
Example:
P2001 Auxiliary function address
[1.] T [2.] M [3.] S [4.] − [5.] − [6.] −
P4022 Subprograms
[1.] 928 [2.] 928 [3.] 0 [4.] 0 [5.] 0 [6.] 0
Auxiliary functions T33 and M34 are located in an NC subprogram. If these auxiliary
functions are not fixed either within the system or by the machine parameters
mentioned above (P4005 ...), both auxiliary functions (T33 and M34) lead to a
callup of NC subprogram 928.
Auxiliary function S" does not lead to a callup of a subprogram, as it is not
assigned to any subprogram in P4022.
IMPORTANT
The numbers ( [1]...[6] ) from P4022 indicate the priority. The first single parameter
has the highest priority.
If there are two auxiliary functions in one block, only the auxiliary function with
highest priority will lead to the subprogram callup.
See example: X100 Y100 .... M34 T33

T33 has highest priority, threfore only T33 leads to
the subprogram callup.
P 4023 Currently not used Range of values: 0
[−] 0
− 80 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 4500 Zero shifts
Machine parameters
P 4500 Zero shifts
P 4501 Number of zero shift groups Range of values: 1, 2, 3
[−] 3
This parameter specifies the number of zero shift groups

(max. 3). The following become active:
Group I G54. G59 if 1 is entered

also Group II G154 ... G159 if 2 is entered
also Group III G254 ... G259 if 3 is entered
P 4502 Zero shift limit values in mm or degrees Range of values: (−9999.999) − (+9999.999)
[MIN] −9999.990 [MAX] 9999.990
Input format: 4.3 = 4 integer digits and 3 post decimal positions.

[MAX] > [MIN].
Limiting values can only be input in mm (please note P 9904).
P 4503 Input via panel − absolute or incremental (ABS/INC)
[−] ABS
Parameter P 4503 specifies whether zero shift values" are calculated in absolutes
or incrementally within the control when they are input via the panel.
− 81 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 5000 Suppression table
Machine parameters
P 5000 Suppression table
IMPORTANT
The ASCII codes displayed in reverse video in the table are ignored by the system
when files are being read in via the logic or panel interfaces.
P 5001 Characters in decimal ASCII code (−1 = not assigned) Range of values: 0 − 127
[0] −1 [1] −1 [2] −1 [3] −1

[4] −1 [5] −1 [6] −1 [7] −1
[8] −1 [9] −1
Using parameter P 5001, you can also suppress up to 10 more different signs
during a readin operation. Input is in decimal ASCII code (see table).
Example: %characters (dec. 37) are filtered out of the data stream:
[0] 37 [1] −1 [2] −1 [3] −1
Dec. Hex ASCII Dec. Hex ASCII Dec. Hex ASCII Dec. Hex ASCII
0 00 NUL 32 20 SP 64 40 @ 96 60 ‘
1 01 SOH 33 21 ! 65 41 A 97 61 a
2 02 STX 34 22 " 66 42 B 98 62 b
3 03 ETX 35 23 # 67 43 C 99 63 c
4 04 EOT 36 24 $ 68 44 D 100 64 d
5 05 ENQ 37 25 % 69 45 E 101 65 e
6 06 ACK 38 26 & 70 46 F 102 66 f
7 07 BEL 39 27 ’ 71 47 G 103 67 g
8 08 BS 40 28 ( 72 48 H 104 68 h
9 09 HT 41 29 ) 73 49 I 105 69 i
10 0A LF 42 2A * 74 4A J 106 6A j
11 0B VT 43 2B + 75 4B K 107 6B k
12 0C FF 44 2C , 76 4C L 108 6C l
_
13 0D CR 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m
14 0E SO 46 2E . 78 4E N 110 6E n
15 0F SI 47 2F / 79 4F O 111 6F o
16 10 DLE 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p
17 11 DC1 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q
18 12 DC2 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r
19 13 DC3 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 s
20 14 DC4 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t
21 15 NAK 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u
22 16 SYN 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 v
23 17 ETB 55 37 7 87 57 W 119 77 w
24 18 CAN 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x
25 19 EM 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y
26 1A SUB 58 3A : 90 5A Z 122 7A z
27 1B ESC 59 3B ; 91 5B [ 123 7B {
28 1C FS 60 3C < 92 5C \ 124 7C |
29 1D GS 61 3D = 93 5D ] 125 7D }
30 1E RS 62 3E > 94 5E "( ) 126 7E ~
31 1F US 63 3F ? 95 5F !( _ ) 127 7F DEL
IMPORTANT
It is not possible to filter out information pertaining to individual axes using this func
tion, as a numerical value is also attached to every piece of axis information.
− 82 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 5500 Device selection
Machine parameters

The settings for transmission can be modified for the following serial interfaces
during device selection:
Type1 osa module 3/5: X31 (V.24/20mA) and X32 (V.24)

Module CP/MEM5 of the CC220: X11 (V.24/20mA) and X21 (V.24)
P 5501 Number of the soft key text (periph. 1 − 4)

[1.] 2400 [2.] 2419 [3.] 2416 [4.] 2418
Parameter P 5501 specifies the texts for the softkeys at select devices" operating
level.
LOAD *SELECT DEVICES

*INTER *DCR *DCR *CCDISK *XTRANS
FACE 4800 BAUD 9600 BAUD 9600 BAUD 9600 BAUD
The corresponding text numbers should be entered.

Text number Text
173 Cassette 4800 Baud
174 Teletype 1200 Baud
2400 DCR 4800 Baud
2401 FER 204 1200 Baud
2402 GNT 4604 600 Baud
2403 TTY 300 Baud
2404 MINI CASS 2400 Baud
2405 FCT 4030 1200 Baud
2406 FCT 4070 600 Baud
2407 LPR 300 300 Baud
2408 ZIP 30 300 Baud
2409 ZIP 585 300 Baud
2410 Periph. 1
2411 Periph. 2
2412 Periph. 3
2413 Periph. 4
2414 Periph. 5
2415 CCDISK 4800 Baud
2416 CCDISK 9600 Baud
2417 XTRANS 4800 Baud
2418 XTRANS 9600 Baud
2419 DCR 9600 Baud
P 5502 Baud rate (periph. 1 − 4)

[1.] 4800 [2.] 9600 [3.] 9600 [4.] 9600
A transmission speed (baud rate) is assigned to each device.
Input possibilities:
1. 110 baud 5. 2400 baud
2. 300 baud 6. 4800 baud
3. 600 baud 7. 9600 baud
4. 1200 baud
Ensure that there is agreement with the texts defined in P 5501.
− 83 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 5503 Stop bits 1/1.5/2 (periph. 1 − 4)
[1.] 1 [2.] 1.5 [3.] 2 [4.] 1
The necessary number of stop bits for the data devices used can be input with
P 5503. Device 1 has 1 stop bit, device 2 transmits with 1.5 stop bits, device 3 needs
2 stop bits.
P 5504 Timeout in s (periph. 1 − 4) Range of values 0 − 127
[1.] 15 [2.] 15 [3.] 15 [4.] 15
The readin or readout operation is timed out, i.e. the control expects to receive
data from the connected device within a specified period of time once the START"
softkey has been actuated.
If no data is received within the period specified in P 5504, or if a long interrupt
occurs, the following message is displayed:
RUN: 149 I/O unit timeout"
P 5505 Space between files (periph. 1−4) (YES/NO)
[1.] YES [2.] YES [3.] YES [4.] YES
Inputting YES" ensures that during Output, several files" enough space is
created between successive files to guarantee that individual programs are read in
by DFS search" (110 x ASCII character ZERO").
P 5506 Peripheral active on switch on (periph. 1−4) Input: 1−4
[NC] 1 [NC2] 1
The device number refers to the specification in P 5501. The defined device is
addressed at the selected interfaces as peripheral active on switch on.
[NC] 1 Device 1 at serial data interface 1 (V.24 or 20mA)

[NC2] 1 Device 1 at serial data interface 2 (V.24)
P 5507 Interface active on switch on (NC/NC2)
[ON] NC [OFF] NC2
Two interfaces are supplied on the front of module CP/MEM4 for inputting and
outputting programs (serial data interface 1 and serial data interface 2).
NC = Serial data interface 1
NC2 = Serial data interface 2
P 5507 specifies the switch on state which is displayed after interface selection".
The switch on state can be different for Input/Output".
The two standard interfaces are specified as 7bit interfaces by the hardware.
Example:
[ON] NC Data in via serial data interface 1 (V.24 or 20mA)
[OFF] NC2 Data out via serial data interface 2 (V.24)
− 84 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 5508 Modulo value for read monitoring (E code) (999/1000)
[−] 999
Parameter 5508 determines the modulo value which is used to calculate the
E code checksum.
Example:
Checksum Modulo value Ecode

1270 999 271
1270 1000 270
1000 999 1
1000 1000 0
Special cases n * 999 999 999
P 5509 Remote diagnosis transmission rate in baud
[−] 300
Valid input values include 300, 1200, 2400 and 4800 baud.
Using P 5509, the transmission speed between the CNC and a remote diagnostic
computer connected by modem or acoustic coupler can be adjusted.
The MP only becomes effective if the REMOTE DIAGNOSIS" option is applied.
P 5510 Dataformat : (periph. 1−4: 0=ASCII, 1=KANJI, 2=BINARY) Range of values 0,1,2
[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0
By selecting the data format it is possible to read files in ASCII, KANJI and BINARY
format into the relevant peripheral interfaces of the CNC.
− 85 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6000 PLC parameters
Machine parameters
P 6001 PLC mode (AUTO,PIC,BIT,WORD) only with CC220

PLC mode (BIT,SPIC1,SPIC2) only with Type1 osa
CC220: [−] AUTO

Type1 osa: [−] SPIC2
This parameter defines the PLC coupling according to control unit series
CC 220:
AUTO Automatic mode: (only with CC220)

the control system automatically
recognises which coupling is present,
with the exception of PIC 250.
PIC PIC 250 coupling (only with CC220)
BIT Bit coupling: (with CC 220 M)

PC 600 / CL 300 / CL400
WORD Word coupling: (CC 220 M only)

PC 600
Type1 osa:
BIT Bit coupling: (with Type1 osa)

CL 300 / CL400
SPIC1 softPIC1 coupling: (with Type1 osa only)

CL 300 / CL400
128 inputs, 128 outputs
SPIC2 softPIC2 coupling: (with Type1 osa only)

CL 300 / CL400
256 inputs, 256 outputs
P 6002 Watchdog period in P2 cycles or task changes Range of values: 1 − 32767

(with CC 220 only)
[−] 100
The NC monitors the flow of data between the PLC and the NC system. In the case
of the bit coupling, a watchdog period is derived from the P2 cycles specified (see
P9901); in the case of word coupling, from the specified task changes. P6002 is
interpreted by a PIC coupling (PIC 250) as a time specification in ms.
If no data exchange takes place within the time specified in the value, the following
message is displayed:
NC fault 2670, PLC timeout"
− 86 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 6003 Word coupling: panel keys and potentiometers via PLC (YES/NO)
[−] NO [−] NO
First assignment: panel keys

Second assignment: potentiometers
Parameter 6003 specifies whether the panel keys or potentiometers are looped via
the PLC. Thus the machine tool manufacturer can influence the way the control
system operates via the PLC (but only if there is a word coupling between CC 220 M
and PC 600).
P 6004 Word coupling: Protected range (0,4,8,12 ... 32 kB)
[−] 4
Parameter 6004 defines an area in the communication memory which the PLC can
query but not overwrite (max. 32K).
This value should only ever be set to less than 4 for test purposes!
P 6005 Word coupling: segmenting of V/K and W memories

[V + K] 5 [W] 15
The user can, if desired, segment the total size of the table memory as follows:
[V+K] Memory area for zero shift tables and compensation tables and
[W] Memory area for W tables.
If no word coupling is present, both values should be entered as 0!

If [ V + K ] is defined as 0, and the V and K tables are deposited in part program
memory.
In the case of [ V + K ] + [ W ] 21 the W tables are deposited on page 1.
The following applies to word coupler WC3: [V+K]< −21
[W]<
−64
P 6006 Update time in ms
[−] 40
CC 220:
P 6006 determines the minimum period of time in which the interface can be
interrogated. The value selected for this time period should not be too small, since
otherwise the relevant processor will be unable to take over any other tasks.
Type1 osa (bitcoupled):

P 6006 determines the time intervals at which the NC and PLC interfaces exchange
data.
Type1 osa (softPICcoupled):

A new cycle of the softPIC program is started once the time determined in P 6006
has elapsed.
IMPORTANT
The value in P6006 should be an integer multiple (min. factor 2) of the interpolator
time (P9901).
Recommendation: P6006: 20ms (with Type1 osa with softPIC)
− 87 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 6007 MTB I/O panel coupling (YES/NO) (only with CC220)

[−] YES
By using parameter 6007 you can decide whether an MTB1 I/O panel coupling is
present or not (for more information on MTB1 I/O panel couplings see Interface
conditions). If YES" is entered, a check is made to ascertain whether an MTB1 I/O
is connected.
If no MTB is recognised during startup, all MTB inputs and outputs are still served
by the panel. In this case no error message will result either. If an MTB was
recognised during startup, it will be monitored during NC operation whether the
connected panel can be operated by the CPMEM.
If P6007 is set to NO, MTB outputs and individual MTB inputs will not be operated.
In this case there is no monitoring of the MTB.
P 6008 Bit coupling: start address NC input/output. Block Range of values: 0 − 255
[−] 0
CC 220
In the case of bit coupling it is possible to use one PLC to operate several NC
systems:
The available address range for an NC + MTB1 I/O amounts to 40 bytes (0.0 − 31.7
for NC, 32.0 − 39.7 for MTB1 I/O).
The available PLC address range (CC 220) can be allocated to individual NCs and
machine I/Os. The PC 400 has an address range of 64 bytes; therefore 2 NCs
cannot be operated simultaneously if a PC 400 is connected. This is why it makes
sense to bit couple a PC 600, as the latter has an address range of 256 bytes. This
enables up to 6 NCs (256 bytes / 40 bytes = 6) to be operated in an I/O address
field.
Parameter P 6008 specifies the address in the PLC address range from which each
NC is addressed.
Type1 osa:
P 6008 has no meaning for Type1 osa. The PLC address is set using the DIL switch
(see Connection conditions Type1 osa, chap. 9 Interface to the PLC").
− 88 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
With a maximum block size of 256, the entire PC 600 I/O address
range can be mapped in each NC (CC220).
PLC IOS−PLC
outputs NC
P 6008 105 bytes
(NC1) = 0 I 0.0 O 0.0 O 0.0 P 6008
=0
P 6010
= 105
I 31.7 O 31.7 O 31.7
NC1
I 32.0 O 32.0 I 32.0

MTB1 I/O
I 39.7 O 39.7 I 39.7
P 6008
(NC2) = 40 P 6008
I/O I 40.0 O 40.0 O 40.0 = 40
bus P 6010
of = 105
PLC I 71.7 O 71.7 O 71.7
NC2
I 72.0 O 72.0 I 72.0

MTB1 I/O
I 79.7 O 79.7 I 79.7
I 80.0 O 80.0 O 80.0 Machine 1

I 92.7 O 92.7 O 92.7
I 93.0 O 93.0 O 93.0

I 104.7 O 104.7 O 104.7 Machine 2
I 255.7 O 255.7 O 255.7
PLC IOS−PLC
inputs NC
P 6008 105 bytes
(NC1) = 0 O 0.0 I 0.0 I 0.0
NC1
O 31.7 I 31.7 I 31.7
O 32.0 I 32.0 I 32.0 MTB1 I/O O 32.0

O 35.7 I 35.7 I 35.7 O 35.7
P 6008
(NC2) = 40 I/O O 40.0 I 40.0 I 40.0
bus NC2
of
PLC O 71.7 I 71.7 I 71.7
O 72.0 I 72.0 I 72.0

O 75.7 I 75.7 MTB1 I/O I 75.7
O 80.0 I 80.0 I 80.0 Machine 1

O 92.7 I 92.7 I 92.7
O 93.0 I 93.0 I 93.0

O 104.7 I 104.7 I 104.7 Machine 2
O 255.7 I 255.7 I 255.7
− 89 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 6009 PIC : System data (marker 124.0 − 127.7) Range of values: numbers 1 and 0
[124] 00000000 [125] 00000000 [126] 00000000 [127] 00000000
Parameter 6009 enables the machine tool manufacturer to use a PIC program for
several types of machine.
IMPORTANT
The PIC program can run in the softPIC" of the Type1 osa or on the PIC250" in the
CC220.
For identification purposes, only numbers 1 and 0 are allowed. All 8 digits must be
entered.
Example:
[124] 00010000 stands for M 124.3
[ 125] 00000100 stands for M 125.5
By activating the MPP, the relevant bits are set to HIGH level and can be queried in
the PLC, so that particular routines can be processed or skipped.
P 6010 Bit coupling: IOS block size (in bytes) Range of values: 0 − 256
[−] 64
The block size determines the size of the window" for the PLCIOS display. The
block size is calculated from start address 0.0 in the PLC address range.
Blocks must be no less than 40 in size.
(0 − 31.7 for the NC input/output + 32.0 − 39.7 and for the MTB1 I/O inputs of the
CC220 series).
Where several NCs are bit coupled to one PLC (P 6008) it is possible to determine,
by specifying the block size, which section of the entire PLCIOS range is displayed
in the individual control.
In the example (see diagram) a block size of 105 was selected for both NCs. This
means that each NC can depict its own status, that of the other NC and the status of
both machines.
If the block size is set at maximum (256 bytes), the entire PC 600 I/O address range
can be depicted in each NC.
P 6011 PIC : Times in s max. 214782.99 s
[ 1.] 0.00 [2.] 0.00 [ 3.] 0.00 [ 4.] 0.00

[ 5.] 0.00 [6.] 0.00 [ 7.] 0.00 [ 8.] 0.00
[ 9.] 0.00 [10.] 0.00 [11.] 0.00 [12.] 0.00
[13.] 0.00 [14.] 0.00 [15.] 0.00 [16.] 0.00
[17.] 0.00 [18.] 0.00 [19.] 0.00 [20.] 0.00
[21.] 0.00 [22.] 0.00 [23.] 0.00 [24.] 0.00
[25.] 0.00 [26.] 0.00 [27.] 0.00 [28.] 0.00
[29.] 0.00 [30.] 0.00 [31.] 0.00 [32.] 0.00
(see P 6012 text)
− 90 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
CC220.
P 6012 PIC : counters Range of values: 0 − 999999999

[1.] 0 [2.] 0 [3.] 0 [4.] 0
[5.] 0 [6.] 0 [7.] 0 [8.] 0
Once the machine parameters are activated, the programmed times and counters
are loaded into the NC and initialised. The PLC starts both times and counters. The
NC is responsible for executing the times and decrementing the counters. The PLC
can only query and evaluate the current status of times and counters (i.e. time
active? time elapsed? counters elapsed?)
IMPORTANT
CC220.
P 6013 CC 220 panel switchover: MTB/PANEL MONITOR Range of values: see below
[MTB] 0 Range of values: 0 − 4
[PAN] 1 Range of values: 1 − 4
[MTB] 0 No MTB monitor.

[MTB] 1 MTB monitoring is permanently active.
Should an error occur, the message 2642 MTB I/O−CARD MISSING"
or 2650 MTB I/O−COUPL. DEFECTIVE" is displayed. In addition to
this, the interface signal PLC I28.7 is set to HIGH.
[MTB] 2 MTB monitoring is permanently active.
Should an error occur, the message 2642 MTB I/OCARD MISSING"
or 2650 MTB I/O COUPL. DEFECTIVE" is displayed. In addition, the
interface signal PLC I28.7 is set to HIGH and READY 2" is removed
from the CC220.
[MTB] 3 as with [MTB] 1, the MTB/panel monitor is only active when the
interface signal PLC O24.7 is set to HIGH.
[MTB] 4 as with [MTB] 2, the MTB/panel monitor is only active when the
interface signal PLC O24.7 is set to HIGH.
[PAN] 1 Panel monitoring is permanently active.
Should an error occur, the message 2641 NO PANEL TRANSFER" or
2646 UARTERRORPANEL" appears on the panel. In addition to this,
the interface signal PLC I28.7 is set to HIGH.
[PAN] 2 Panel monitoring is permanently active.
Should an error occur, the message 2641 NO PANEL TRANSFER" or
2646 UART−ERROR PANEL" appears on the panel. In addition, the
interface signal PLC I28.7 is set to HIGH and READY 2" is removed
from the CC220.
− 91 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
[PAN] 3 as with [PAN] 1, the panel monitor is only active when the interface
signal PLC O24.7 is set to HIGH.
[PAN] 4 as with [PAN] 2, the panel monitor is only active when the interface
signal PLC O24.7 is set to HIGH.
Machine parameter P6013 is used to make settings when employing several

panel/MTBs with several NCs. This depends on the presence of a suitable piece of
hardware providing a changeover point between the NCs and the panel/MTBs.
This parameter can be used to set the various levels of the panel and MTB
monitors. Normal operation (an NC connected with an MTB) includes a constant
check for the connection between panel and NC (or MTB and NC). A panel
switchover interrupts the connection between panel/MTB and NC. Monitoring can
be switched off for NCs which do not have a panel connection by removing the IF
signal PLC O24.7.
Any response from the panel/MTB monitor must be reported to the PLC control
unit. Interface signal PLC I28.7 is set to HIGH if there is a panel/MTB error.
Explanations
Observe the following settings and preconditions in connection with the machine
parameter:
1. MTB switchover
The MTB signals are set to LOW if there is a switchover from a panel with an MTB
connected to a panel without an MTB. If there is a switchover at a later point to a
panel with an MTB, the signals of the activated MTB will be effective again.
2. Absolute and incremental potentiometers

Incremental potentiometers do not cause a change in feedrate when there is a
switch of panels. The stored potentiometer value of the relevant NC control unit
continues to be effective. Absolute potentiometers, on the other hand, cause
feedrate changes with varying potentiometer settings and active traverse
movements (incremental potentiometers should instead be used for panel
switchovers).
3. Handwheel
Analog handwheels behave like incremental potentiometers. With a suitable
changeover point it is also possible to switch between a number of MTBs with
digital handwheels connected.
4. Colour panel and monochrome panel

A special changeover point is required for switching between colour and
monochrome panels.
− 92 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
Powerup state: The PLC must ensure that NCs without a panel are excluded from
the MTB/Panel monitoring.
Where several panels are involved, only one can be active. There is no display for
those panels which are not active.
When potentiometers are in use, it should be ensured before switching panels that
there is no traverse movement active (e.g. execution of a program), as this could
lead to changes to the feedrate value.
For further information, see the Type1 osa / CC 220 Signal description" manual.
P 6014 CC 220 panel switchover: Display of the NC identifier (−1 = none)

Range of values: −1 ... 999
[NO.] −1
Screen display NC identifier
P 999999988 NC 3 NC
N 16000 READY 20.11. 15:45
If a number of NCs are connected to one or more panels, the first line of the NC
screen indicates which control unit (NC identifier) is currently selected.
P 6015 CS tables for writing via interface Range of values: 0 − 999999999
[40] 0 [41] 0 [42] 0 [43] 0 [44] 0
If there is no word coupling present, then data can be entered in the table via the
multinterface. The CS table number is stored in parameter P6015 [40] ...[44]. Up to
5 different CS tables can be selected, to which 5 different multimodes correspond
(40−44).
Multimode PLC O7.0 − O7.7 determines which CS table is to be written in.
Multimode Machine parameter CS table number (range of values)

40 P6015 [40] 0 − 999999999
...
...
44 P6015 [44] 0 − 999999999
− 93 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Observation:
The various data information in a CS table contains the multidata PLC O8.0 −
O11.7.
CS group 1−256 PLC O8.0 − O8.7

CS column 1−26 PLC O9.0 − O9.4
CS data in LOW/HIGH word of the CS address PLC O9.4
CS group > 256−999 PLC O9.6 − O9.7
CS data PLC O10.0 − O11.7
IMPORTANT
If the value 0 has been entered in one of the machine parameters, the appertaining
Multimode (+Multistrobe) will not activate a write cycle into a CS table.
If CS tables being used by the NC are modified, it should be ensured that the data
change is permitted by the PLC.
For further information, refer to the interface signals PLC O7.0 − O11.7, O6.5 in
Type1 osa / CC 220 Signal description".
− 94 −
P 6100 Electronic limit switches normal Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6200 Electronic limit switches fast Machine parameters
P 6100 Electronic limit switches normal (optional)
Explanatory notes on P 6100 and P 6200
Electronic limit switches monitor absolute machine positions or ranges and act as
replacements for mechanical limit switches.
A total of 20 limit switch ranges are available (16 normal and 4 fast (minimum /
maximum)), which can be defined by setting machine parameters. A separate IF
signal is allocated to each range. This IF signal switches to HIGH level if the axis is
positioned somewhere within the defined range. There are 2 kinds of signal output:
‘ 16 signals via the standard interface for normal" limit switches (response
time: block cycle time)
‘ 4 signals via the highspeed I/O on the servo card (response time: clock time)
The monitoring of the normal travel limit ranges begins once all axes have reached
home position.
The monitoring of the fast travel limit ranges begins once the relevant axis has
reached its home position.
If servo 6i is used, see P 9507 to P9509.
The parameters in set 6100 only appear if the 16 limit switches normal" option is
activated. The parameters in set 6200 only appear if the 4 limit switches fast"
option is activated.
[AX]: Axis number to be allocated to the travel limit range.
[MIN], [MAX]: Limits of range. The input values are axis positions which relate to
the reference point. If the axis is positioned within the range de
fined here, then the relevant interface signal switches to HIGH.
The max. range is adjusted according to the length of the machine
working area.
The following entry is valid: [MIN] < [MAX].
If [MIN] = [MAX] is set then a pointtopoint watchdog function
can be implemented.
In the case of an ENDLESS" axis type, only the values 0 o <=[MIN]
< o
= [MAX] < 359.999 may be entered. For the ROTARY" axis
type, the input of negative values is only allowed if [CYC]= NO.
[CYC]: NO: For the ROTARY" axis type, the range

only exists one single time within the possible travel path
(absolute axis position).
YES: The defined travel limit range takes effect every time a
ROTARY" type axis revolves.
IMPORTANT
In the case of ENDLESS" axes, the [CYC] parameter has no effect!
The travel limit ranges defined for this axis type are in principle effective during
every revolution.
− 95 −
P 6101 TRAVEL LIMIT RANGE 1
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
− 96 −
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
P 6200 Electronic limit switches fast
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
[AX] 0 [MIN] 0.000 [MAX] 0.000 [CYC] YES
− 97 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6300 Laser applications
Machine parameters
P 6300 Laser applications (optional)

Machine parameter group 6300 can only be used in conjunction with Type1
osa M and CC 220 M.
P 6301 Analog output for laser power control
Range of values: CC 220 M: 0, (P101[SYNC]+P101[ASY]+1) up to max. 8
Type1 osa M: 0, (P101[SYNC]+P101[ASY]+1) up to max. 5
(0 = no output)
[−] 0
Specify in P 6301 which system axis (analog output) is to be used for the laser
power control. The number of the output is derived from the number of system axes
defined in P101. Please note the maximum possible number of system axes of your
hardware configuration.
Example: System axes present: 5

P101 [SYNC] = 3
P101 [ASY] = 1
resulting in: 3+1+1 = 5 (the analog output is connected to the

5th system axis)
Example: System axes present: 8

P101 [SYNC] = 3
P101 [ASY] = 2
resulting in: 3+2+1 = 6 (the analog output can be connected to the

6th, 7th or 8th system axis)
IMPORTANT
Analog outputs which have been assigned to synchronous or asynchronous axes
cannot be used for purposes of laser power control.
CC 220 M: With P 9502 any analog output of any SERVO icard may be allocated to
this system axis. The voltage available here is dependent on the actual
and nominal values of the feedrate ( FACT / FSET) and falls within the limits
0 <
=U <
= 10 V.
P 6302 Offset of output for laser power control [in %] Range of values: −33 to +33:
[−] 0.00
If a voltage offset should occur at the corresponding axis analog output when axes
are stationary, this can be compensated with P 6302.
Example:
Offset = +10 mV
100 % = 10 V
0.1 % = 10 mV
Entry required: −0.10
− 98 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6400 Tangential tool control
Machine parameters
P 6400 Tangential tool control (optional)
IMPORTANT
Machine parameter set 6400 is only displayed if the TANGENTIAL TOOL
CONTROL" option is applied (only in conjunction with Type1 osa M and
CC 220M).
P 6401 Number of the tool axis
[−] 3
In parameter 6401 it can be specified which of the synchronous rotary axes

(ROTARY" and ENDLESS" axis types are valid; see P101, P102, P107) should be
used for tangential tool control. Enter the number of the relevant system axis.
This rotary axis rotates a tool in such a way that once G functions 131 or 132 have
been programmed, it is automatically carried at a tangent to the contour
programmed in the X−Y plane. The rotation always takes place between
2 programmed blocks, or during one block in the case of circular interpolation.
After Control Reset, Clear All Logic, Load Backup, or after programming G130, the
axis defined here can be programmed in the same way as a normal synchronous
rotary axis.
P 6402 Maximum angle of rotation in degrees Range of values: 0 o< P 6402 <=360 o
[−] 0
During the transition between two linear blocks, the rotary axis defined in P 6401
must be rotated by a specific amount. Before executing a circular block, the rotary
axis must first be turned at a tangent to the path.
a
2
1 3 1 2 3
a
Rotation between 2 linear blocks Rotation before circular block
A threshold angle can be specified in P 6402. If this threshold is exceeded, the tool
is raised before it is rotated, and then lowered again after it has been rotated.
The PLC is responsible for raising and lowering the tool.
On detecting a violation of the threshold angle, the CNC issues two signals to the
highspeed outputs of the SERVO closedloop control circuit card (X31) or the
Type1 osa module (X21) (see P 6403 and P 6404).
− 99 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6400 Tangential tool control
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
If the maximum angle of rotation is set to 360°, then no signals for lifting and
lowering the tool are issued to at the SERVO i (X31) control loop card or the Type1
osa module (X21).
P 6403 Raising time in scanning cycles Range of values: 1 to 32767
[−] 10
Depending on parameters P 6401 and 6402, the signal for raising the tool is issued
to X31 on the SERVO i control loop card or Type1 osa module (X21) for a period of T
= P 6403 * P 9901 [ms]. The tool is subsequently rotated. Once the rotation has
been completed, the signal for lowering the tool is issued (see P 9507 and P 9508).
P 6404 Lowering time in scan cycles Range of values: 1 to 32767
[−] 10
Depending on parameters P 6401 and 6402, the signal for lowering the tool is
issued to X31 on the SERVO i control loop card or Type1 osa module (X21) for a
period of T = P 6404 * P 9901 [ms] (see P 9507 and P 9508).
− 100 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6500 Centre parameters
Machine parameters

IMPORTANT
Centre parameters can be used only in conjunction with Type1 osa M and CC220 M.
P 6501 Number of tool compensations in a table radius (D) length (H)

Input: 48, 96 ... 960
[D] 48 [H] 48
Parameter P 6501 determines the number of tool compensations, which can be
programmed as follows: 48, 96, 144, 192 etc., i.e. as a multiple of 48 up to max. 960.
Depending on the number of tool compensations, memory use (see parameter
6005) [V + K] should be set to a larger or smaller value (only where word coupling
PC 600 is present).
P 6502 Operating panel input of tool compensations (ABS/INC)

[−] ABS
It is possible to input the compensation values via the operating panel as
absolute" or incremental" values.
ABS = Absolute
INC = Incremental
P 6503 Limits for radius compensation Range of values: [MIN]: −99999896 to [MAX]
[MAX]: [MIN] to 99999896
[MIN] −10000 [MAX] 10000
The limits for radius compensation (min, max) can be specified using parameter P
6503.
Values outside the range defined are not stored in the table.
P 6504 Limits for length compensation Range of values: (as in P 6503)

[MIN] −10000 [MAX] 10000
Parameter 6504 specifies the tabular limits for length compensation.
Values outside the range defined are not stored in the table.
P 6505 Format of radius compensation (predecimal and post−decimal places)
[G71] 43 [G70] 34
Parameter P 6505 specifies the number of integer digits and post decimal places
which should be entered for radius compensations in metric units [G71] or inches
[G70] .
[G71] 43 means: Metric: 4 integer places
3 post decimal places
[G70] 34 means: Inch 3 integer places
− 101 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
The first and second digit should fall within the range 1 to 7. Furthermore, the sum
total of the integer digits and post decimal positions should not exceed 8. For
example, 55 is an invalid option! Parameter 6503 should be adapted accordingly.
P 6506 Format of length compensation (predecimal and postdecimal places)
[G71] 43 [G70] 34
Parameter P 6506 specifies the number of integer digits and post decimal places
which should be entered for length compensations in metric units [G71] or inches
[G70].
[G71] 43 means: Metric 4 integer places
[G70] 34 means: Inch 3 integer places
See note on P 6505. Parameter 6504 should be adapted accordingly.
P 6507 Axis for which length compensation active Range of values: CC 220: 1−8
Type1 osa: 1 − 5
[−] 3
In parameter P 6507, the active length compensation and drilling cycle switchover
are allocated to the specified drilling axis (synchronous linear axis). The direction of
the correction can be specified by +/− signs.
Example:
3rd axis is drilling axis (= Zaxis)
Entry: 3
IMPORTANT
The drilling axis can be switched also via CNC digital interface using a multimode
function (see Connection conditions, part 2).
P 6508 Standardisation of PLC compensation radius (R) length (L) Range of values: 1 − 100000
[R] 43 [L] 1000
As the PLC corrections are sent to the NC in increments, they must be converted
into mm or other units of measurement within the NC itself.
An increment (I) transferred from the PLC correspondsd to
1 . (P 9904)
I=
P 6508
Examples
1 . (P 9904) P 6508 Number of increments interpreted

transferred from PLC as
1 . mm / 1000 . 1 = 1 mm
1 . mm / 100 . 1 = 10 mm
1 . mm / 10 . 1 = 100 mm
1 . mm / 1 . 1 = 1 mm
1 . mm / 1 . 25 = 25 mm
1 . mm / 1000 . 250 = 250 mm
− 102 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 6509 Collision control with compensation active (YES/NO)

[−] YES
Parameter P 6509 specifies whether milling path compensation with collision
control is present or not.
F F
F
IMPORTANT
As collision control is computerbound, this parameter should be suppressed
during timecritical processing.
P 6510 Max. feed threading (m/min) Range of values: 0 − P 501

[1.] 3.000 [2.] 3.000 [3.] 3.000 [4.] 3.000
P 6510 specifies the maximum feedrate during threading operations. The input
value of an axis should lie between 0 and the maximum feedrate defined in
parameter 501.
P 6511 Reciprocating axis number

[−] 4
If the reciprocating axis" option is applied, the number of the system axis which is
to act as reciprocating axis (CC 220:1−8; Type1 osa: 1−5) can be entered here
(must be an asynchronous system axis!). Any physical axis input/output of any
SERVOi (CC 220) or Type1 osa module can be allocated to this system axis via
P 9502. The reciprocal axis can be switched on with G function G993 and switched
off by means of G994. If the reciprocal axis is switched off, the axis entered here
may be programmed as a normal asynchronous axis.
P 6512 T output during block search / test operation (with word coupling only) (YES/NO)
[−] NO
NO: No T word output. YES: All T words output
If the WITHOUT TOOL CORR." softkey is inactive (compensation active) and a
value of 1" or 2" is assigned to parameter P 2010, the output of auxiliary function
T" can be forced using P 6512 = YES. This will force the output of all programmed
T words both during a block search and in testing mode. In testing mode, where
P 6512 = YES, the AUX.FUNCT.INHIBIT" softkey does not affect the output of
T words (the value in P 2010 is then meaningless).
IMPORTANT
If a subroutine is specified in P 4014, then this machine parameter has no further
effect on the output of auxiliary functions.
− 103 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 6513 M output during block search/in testing mode (with word coupling only) Range of values: 1 − 999
[1] 0 [2] 0 [3] 0 [4] 0
[5] 0
0: No M function output. > 0: Specified M function output.
If the WITHOUT TOOL CORR." softkey is inactive (−−> compensation active),
and a value of 1" or 2" is assigned to parameter 2010, the output of all M auxiliary
functions defined in P 6513 can be forced. This will force the output of all
programmed M words entered in P 6513 both during a block search and in testing
mode. In testing mode, the AUX.FUNCT.INHIBIT" softkey does not affect the
output of M functions entered in P 6513 (the value in P 2010 is then meaningless).
IMPORTANT
If a subroutine is specified in P 4014, then this machine parameter has no further
effect on the output of auxiliary functions.
P 6514 Display space NC block simulation positive in mm Range of values: 1 − 20000

[1.A] 9999.990 [2.A] 9999.990 [3.A] 9999.990 [4.A] 9999.990
See also parameter P 1505.
P 6515 Display space NC block simulation negative in mm Range of values: (−20000) − 1

[1.A] −9999.990 [2.A] −9999.990 [3.A] −9999.990 [4.A] −9999.990
See also parameter P 1506.
P 6516, P 6517
Explanations for P6516 and P6517
Special customerspecific central functions, available without activation of a

special application bit, are parameterised via parameter fields P6516 and P6517.
P6516 contains 64 integer variables, P6517 contains 64 real variables. The
parameters are all preassigned with 0. In order to activate or parameterise the
special functions, the repective parameters must be set by the user.
The meaning of the individual values is dependent on the respective customer
specific functions. The following functions are currently available:
1. Interface signal POSITION REACHED

An interface signal can be output for a maximum of 2 chosen axes at a defined
distance before the end point of a traversing movement. If the selected axis
reaches the definable distance when approaching an end position, a definable NC
output signal is set to HIGH by the NC. This interface signal is reset to Low when a
new end point is entered (block change), provided that the traverse distance is
longer than the defined distance.
The distance to the end point is defined by P6517 [1] and [3], the number of the
interface signal used in P6516 [2] and [10], the axis number corresponding to P102
with P6516 [1] or [9].
− 104 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
If the axis is traversed with a high feedrate and the defined distance to the endpoint
is small, setting the signal will not take place if block change occurs without exact
positioning (path slope).
A maximum of 2 axes can be monitored.
2. Interface signal MOVEMENT ON

For machine tools with laser applications, the laser may only be active if the laser
head is also actually moved.
A special PLC input signal P6516 [3] is provided for this task; it is set by the NC to
High under the following conditions:
− No positioning movement (G0, G10) is active.

− Error P2 is not present.
− For at least one of the synchronous axes, the lag (command value − position
value) is greater than the value set in P6517 [9 to 16].
Important: If the lag (command value − position value) for at least one of the
selected synchronous axes is smaller than the value set in P6517
[17 to 24], the PLC input signal P6516 [3] is set to LOW.
The number of the interface signal used is specified in P6516 [3], the limit value for
the lag of the individual axes for recognising movement on" status, positive and
negative edges, in P6517 [9 to 24].
IMPORTANT
P6006 determines the time elapsed before the interface signal Movement On" is
formed.
3. Selecting MACHINE OPERATING MODE" via PLC

Before a dialog program (e.g. CPL) can be started in Machine" operating mode,
the PLC has to set a PLC output signal, which causes the NC to change to
MACHINE MODE". The number of the PLC output signal can be defined by the
user in P6516 [4]. Machine" operating mode is activated with the positive edge of
the PLC output signals defined in P6516 [4].
For more information, refer to the Interface signal descriptions PLC O6.3 and PLC
O6.4 in Type1 osa Signal description".
− 105 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
4. Program exchangability series T

Special expansions were carried out to achieve series T program exchangeability.
The following functions are activated by machine parameter P6516 [5], [6] and [7]:
4.1 Mirroring via interface

Axes can be mirrored via interface signal. A range of up to 8 interface signals (one IF
signal per synchronous axis) can be defined via P6516 [5]. By setting the relevant
interface signals to HIGH status, individual axes can be mirrored around the
programmed zero point via the PLC. The following IF signals are assigned
according to the number of synchronous axes.
Example: 4 synchronous axes P6516 [5] =211, (i.e. 211 to 214 are in use!)
Mirroring via interface is carried out in operating modes NC and MDI, if no

programmed mirroring (G38) is active in the program.
4.2 Special EIA codes

Nonstandard EIA codes can be converted during readin to the control via P6516,
parameter [6]. The value 256 activates the Special EIA Code" function.
The following characters are interpreted differently:

− Standard ( " is interpreted as )"
− Standard @" is interpreted as ("
− Standard ) " is interpreted as SP" (space)
4.3 G93 NIT / EIT
Inverse time programming can be activated via P6516 [7] (Inverse Time
Programming or Extended Inverse Time Programming).
The value 1 activates the Inverse Time Programming.
Feedrate value F is then defined as follows:
Time programming Normal Inverse Time" (NIT)
Linear: F(NIT) = (feedrate (mm/min) / path (mm)) x factor
Circular: F(NIT) = (feedrate (mm/min) / radius (mm)) x factor
Time programming Extended Inverse Time" (EIT)

Linear: F(EIT) = (feedrate (mm/min) / path (mm)) x (−1024) x factor
Circular: F(EIT) = (feedrate (mm/min) / radius (mm)) x (−1024) x factor
The range of values for P6516 [7] is as follows:

G93 time programming: 0
G93 inverse time programming (NIT, EIT): 1 (Micro 5)
G93 inverse time programming (NIT, EIT): 10 (System 5)
4.4 Unit for dwell time (G4 F10)

See P9917.
4.5 Quadrant programming
See IF signal PLC O20.4 (Type1 osa / CC 220 Signal description).
− 106 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
5. Endless linear axis

A linear axis can traverse endlessly" in one direction if the axis position is subject to
a part programcontrolled reset (G100).
All axes where G100 is permitted are entered in binary code in P6516 (centre
options range 1), parameter 11. The axes have the following significance:
Axis Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1
Significance 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Where more than one axis is involved, the value to be entered in P6516 [11] is the
sum of the individual values of the axes.
Example: The 2nd and 4th axes are to be enabled for G100.
2+8=10
The value 10" is therefore entered in P6516 centre option range 1 [11].
IMPORTANT
This machine parameter is not checked when received. Rotary axes or

asynchronous axes which are designated are ignored.
6. Tapping
Machine parameter P6516 [2] centre options range 2 can be used to set the
spindle inpos window for tapping.
It is possible to set the size of the spindle inpos window at the beginning and end of
the cycle with parameters P6516 and P7012.
The control unit waits for the inpos signal in accordance with its inposition logic in
various tapping phases:
Cycle start (first G32 block): Waits for the inpos (P1508) of the
drilling axis and the inpos of the spindle
Reversal point: is regulated in the controlled unit
Cycle end (last G32 block) Waits for the inpos of the spindle
The control unit is set for standard operation:
Spindle inpos window (cycle start) = Max. (1.1 degree, P7012)

Spindle inpos window (cycle end) = Max. (3.0 degrees, P7012)
if P6517 [2] is set <= 0.000.
The control unit searches for the maximum value of the inpos window for
cycle start and cycle end.
If P6516 [2] lies between 0.001 and 360.000 degrees, then the following
rule applies:
Spindle inpos window (cycle start) = P6516 [2]
Spindle inpos window (cycle end) = Max. (3.0 degrees, P6516 [2])
The spindle inpos window usually receives values between 0.4 and 5.0 degrees.
− 107 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
7. Error status via interface

In order to inform the PLC of the operating status of the NC, the current NC error
status (4 error statuses present a total of 8 NC error groups in BCD code) is passed
on to the PLC using the interface signal.
The number of the 1st interface signal for error status 1" is defined via P6516 [8].
The following error statuses 2, 4 and 8" use the next three IF signals:
Example: P6516 [8]= 200, (i.e. 200−203 are in use)
If P6516 [8]= 0, then the error status output is inactive.
For more information, see IF signal I25.0−I25.7 (Type1 osa / CC 220 Signal
description) or the descriptions of error messages in Error messages CC220".
P 6516 Centre options range 1

Param. Meaning Range of
P6516 values
[1] IF signal pos. reached";
Number of the axis first monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
[2] IFSignal Pos. reached",
Number of the PLC input interface signal (decimal)
(first monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 − 207
[3] IF signal MOVEMENT ON, number of the
PLC input interface signal (decimal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 − 207
[4] IF signal Machine mode", number of the
PLC output interface signal (decimal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 − 215
[5] “Program exchangeability series T",
Number of 1st IF signal for mirror switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 − 215
Special EIA code. ON, OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0, 256
G93 Inverse time programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0, 1, 10
[8] IF signal error status via interface", number of the
first PLC input interface signal (decimal) . . . . . . . . . . 0, 200 − 207
[9] IF signal pos. reached",
Number of the second axis monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 − 8
Number of the PLC input interface signal (decimal)
(second monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 − 207
[11] Assembled significance" of all axes, where
G100 (endless linear axis) is permitted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
[12]..[64] not assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
− 108 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 6517 Centre options range 2

P6517 values

distance (mm or degrees) to end point,
(first monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 − 9999.999
[2] Size of the spindle inpos window in tapping
− cycle start and end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . −1.000, 0.001 − 360.000
distance (mm or degrees) to end point,
(second monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 − 9999.999
[4]..[8] not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
[9] IF signal MOVEMENT ON", limit value
1st axis with positive edge
2nd axis with positive edge
3rd axis with positive edge
4th axis with positive edge
1st axis with negative edge
2nd axis with negative edge
3rd axis with negative edge
4th axis with negative edge
[25]..[32] not used
IMPORTANT
The values entered in P 6516 and P 6517 are not checked for plausibility when the
machine parameters are transferred. Ensure that no overlapping occurs as a result
of value selection in the parameters (e.g. IF numbers).
− 109 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6600 Compensations parameters
Machine parameters
P 6600 Compensation parameters (optional)

The compensation parameters (drift compensation) can be applied as options
(extracost options). After manual compensation has been made for drift during
system startup, subsequent symptoms of drift (caused e.g. by changes in
temperature) are compensated online" by the drift compensation function.
If the option is applied, drift compensation is switched on by the first travel

command issued for the relevant axis.
It is activated if an axis comes to rest (see P 1508), or the axisrelated CNC interface
input DRIFTCOMP.OFF is set to low level and the lag does not fall within the valid
range (P6601) after a specified delay (P6607).
Thereafter, the offset in the servo loop is corrected step by step until the lag falls
within the valid range. If the lag does fall within the limit specified in P6603, the loop
gain factor is increased (P 6604). This increase in the loop gain factor is carried out
once only and replaces one offset compensation stage.
In order to ensure that the lag has been correctly reset after a compensation stage,
calculation of the lag by the amount specified in P6602 can be delayed. If after this
delay, the offset is still greater than the maximum permissible drift (P6608), the
compensating operation is aborted and an error message output.
The strength of the compensation is affected by parameter 6605. In the process,
any selected input values which are too high may cause oscillations to appear,
while low values will extend the compensation delay.
The compensation process is aborted by a new traversing movement or HIGH level
on axisrelated CNC interface input DRIFTCOMP.OFF (25.0 to 25.7).
Drift compensation has no effect on spindles or ANALOG axes.
P 6601 Delay until axis comes to rest in P2 cycles Range of values: 0 − 1000
[1.A] 300 [2.A] 300 [3.A] 300 [4.A] 300
P 6601 is activated once interpolation (see P1508) has been completed. By setting
a delay, it can be ensured that the axes have come safely to rest on arriving at the
inpos window, before the lag is determined (see P 6607).
For a clock unit of e.g. 10 ms (see P 9901), default value 300 would correspond to a
3 sec delay (P 9901 * P 6601).
P 6602 Delay until axes in position (in P2 cycles) Range of values: 0 − 1000
[1.A] 300 [2.A] 300 [3.A] 300 [4.A] 300
The delay is activated after an increase in the loop gain factor, or after each drift
compensation operation.
− 110 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6600 Compensations parameters
Machine parameters
P 6603 Lag limit for loop gain factor increase (in pulses/P2 cycles) Range of values: 0 − 1000
[1.A] 2 [2.A] 2 [3.A] 2 [4.A] 2
In the event of underflow of the value specified here, the increase in the loop gain
factor specified in P 6604 is activated.
P 6604 Increase factor for loop gain value Range of values: 0.001 − 10.000
[1.A] 1.000 [2.A] 1.000 [3.A] 1.000 [4.A] 1.000
The loop gain value can be dynamically affected by direct reference to parameter
6603. In the process, the loop gain value is only increased once.
LF value = P 1001 x P 6604
The loop gain factor increase is used to approach the 0mm window.
(0 mm window: inpos range P 1508=1, P 6607=0).
P 6605 Compensation evaluation Range of values: 0.001 − 10.000
[1.A] 1.000 [2.A] 1.000 [3.A] 1.000 [4.A] 1.000
P 6605 affects parameter 118 as follows:
Offset compensation value = Lag x P 6605
P 6606 Currently unused
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
P 6607 Drift compensation switchon value in pulses Range of values: 0 − 1000
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
The drift compensation logic is only activated if after running P 6601 the lag (in
pulses) is greater than P 6607.
P 6608 Maximum drift compensation value in pulses Range of values: 0 − 10000
[1.A] 10000 [2.A] 10000 [3.A] 10000 [4.A] 10000
If P 6608 is exceeded, the drift compensation function is aborted and an error

message issued.
− 111 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6800 Look ahead
Machine parameters
P 6800 Contourdependent feedrate override (Look ahead)

The control unit is usually able to adjust automatically the operating feedrate on the
workpiece contour for a single program block in advance (G8, path slope).
The Look ahead" option allows the CNC to expand its look ahead range to 10
program blocks, thus enabling acceleration or braking beyond several blocks.
In addition, this option allows an automatic feedrate reduction during execution on
(or even above) the block cycle limit or during direct execution" (DNC, P0
operation). This prevents brief fluctuations in speed (axis stutter). Such problems
tend to occur at high feedrates with extremely small traverse paths per program
block.
Advantages of this option:
− short machining times

− optimal machining quality.
The Look ahead" option can be parameterised in parameter set 6800. Various
functioning methods of this option may be set separately for G codes G8, G108,
G109 and G110. The programmed G code then defines the desired operation
mode for part machining.
In addition, path acceleration is controlled via G106 / G107 (on/off) with active
contourdependent feedrate override (G108, G109 or G110 is programmed or G8
is programmed and P6801 [8] is <> 0).
A speed jump (slope jump) during acceleration and braking can be set in P1003 for
G8, G9 and G108.
Detailed information on contourdependent feedrate override" may be found in

Type1 osa / CC220 or CC320 programming manuals under the relevant G code
descriptions.
P 6801 Strategy for block transition speed Input values: 0, 1, 2
[8] 0 [108] 2 [109] 2 [110] 2
P 6801 specifies a strategy for CNC internal calculation of block transition speed for
G8, G108, G109 and G110. The following inputs are permissible:
0: Normal path slope logic; see programming manual CC320M under G8"
Gfunction. This input is only valid for parameter [8] and is always necessary if
the Look ahead" option is not applied!
1: No reduction in path speed between blocks. Traversing occurs at the

programmed speed regardless of the contour. Speed is only reduced if the
path within the look ahead range is no longer sufficient for braking the axes.
− 112 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6800 Look ahead
Machine parameters
This strategy is only intended for very special cases and is only employed if
very small angle or direction changes occur in the program. The maximum
change in feedrate set with P1007 can be considerably exceeded by using
this strategy during machining!
2: Corresponding to the maximum change in feedrate (standard case). The

CNC reduces the speed in accordance with the set max. change in feedrate
depending on the contour (P1007). Speed is also reduced if the path within
the look ahead range is no longer sufficient for braking the axes.
The feed potentiometer remains ineffective during the slope phase! Here the
axis continuously traverses the slope. Exception: An axis stop results if the
potentiometer value is 0%.
P 6802 Monitoring the programmed speed Input: YES/NO
[8] YES [108] YES [109] YES [110] YES
YES: Programmed speed is monitored

NO: Programmed speed is not monitored
The control internally calculates the necessary block transition speed according to
the strategy entered in P 6801.
If a block transition speed is now programmed which is greater or lesser than the
speed calculated internally (see P 6807), it can be specified in P 6802 which of
these two speeds is to be the actual traversing speed. Inputting YES" signifies that
the lesser of the two speeds (programmed and internally calculated) will be the
traversing speed. Inputting NO" signifies that the traversing speed will be the
programmed block transition speed.
NOTE
In this case, maintaining the machine limiting data is the sole responsibility of the
programmer!
Inputting NO" has particular relevance to the use of external preprocessors, if

these are able to generate correctly the nominal speed values according to the
programmed contour. Furthermore, the look ahead range can be significantly
expanded via the preprocessor. In all of these cases, where the preprocessor
determines the maximum permissible block transition speeds and generates the
corresponding values in the NC program, the speed no longer needs to be
monitored by the CNC during machining.
IMPORTANT
If the value 0" was entered in P 6801 under G8, only YES" may be entered in P
6802 at [8].
P 6803 Minimum buffer distance in mm Range of values: 0 − 999
[8] 0 [108] 0 [109] 0 [110] 0
A distance (traverse path) may be entered separately here for each G function.
After a program/cycle start, machine execution does not begin until this distance is
processed by block preparation. In this way the CNC receives sufficient
information relating to the path to be traversed, in particular in the case of blocks
− 113 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6800 Look ahead
Machine parameters
with short traversing paths. This enables the CNC, if necessary, to accelerate
beyond several blocks even to the start of a traversing section (a traversing
section is identified by a speed of 0 at the beginning and the end). In this way a
uniform/high speed level is reached from the very beginning of execution.
Execution is started even before the mimimum buffer distance is reached in the
following cases:
1. 10 blocks have already been prepared, or
2. The end of the cycle/program has been reached (by the block preparation).
Use the following formula to calculate P 6803:

2
(typ. feedrate)
P6803 =
2 * P1002
Example: Typical feedrate for machine: 5 m/min
P1002 = 1 m/s2
(5 m/min)2 25 m2 / 3600 s 2
P6803 = 2
= = 3.42 m
2 * 1m/s 2 * 1 m/s2
Input in P6803: 4 mm
IMPORTANT
P6803 only has a function with P6804 Auto feed reduction due to block cycle time"
= 2. Otherwise, execution is delayed at the start of a LookAhead cycle until 9
blocks have been prepared by the NC.
P 6804 Auto feed reduction due to block cycle time: 0, 1, 2
[8] 0 [108] 0 [109] 0 [110] 0
(BLC − Block cycle time) If feedrate is high and the traverse paths extremely small
per program block, brief fluctuations in speed (axis stutter) may occur (block
execution is faster than block preparation).
Using P 6804, it may be specified whether and how such fluctuations in speed
should be avoided for G8, G108, G109 and G110 individually:
0: No reduction in speed.
1: Execution time for block at least as long as block cycle time (for programmed
auxiliary functions, see also P 6806). This strategy may be used for programs
with many subsequent blocks (>12) which all have shorter execution times
than the block cycle time.
2: Speed is only reduced when the buffer is empty. Recommended for programs
with alternatively short and long blocks (in relation to block execution times).
IMPORTANT
Recommended strategy: 1
− 114 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 6800 Look ahead
Machine parameters
P 6805 Extension factor of BLC Range of values: 0 − 10.0
[8] 2.5 [108] 2.5 [109] 2.5 [110] 2.5
The Look ahead" option must be adjusted to the block cycle time of its control
during implementation and also after the CNC is equipped later with another,
additional option. This adjustment is carried out via P 6805.
Firstly determine the block cycle time using the appropriate test program (e.g. the
required time for executing 1000 straight traverse paths each of 1mm for all
synchronous axes with typical CNC configuration, i.e. usually with active options
such as milling path compensation, Look ahead, precontrol, etc.). P 6805 may then
be calculated according to the following formula:
calculated execution time in ms

P 6805 =
10 * number of executed blocks
Using diagnostic program axis oscilloscope", check whether fluctuations in

speed occur during the execution of the test program. If so, P 6805 should be
increased in stages until this effect ceases.
IMPORTANT
Inputting 0" in P 6805 causes strategy 0" in P 6804!
P 6806 Extension time of BLC for programmed auxiliary functions Range of values: 0 − 120
[8] 0.03 [108] 0.03 [109] 0.03 [110] 0.03
Input in seconds; e.g. 0.03" = 30 ms
For blocks with auxiliary function output with transfer stop" (see P 2002), the
acknowledgement time of the auxiliary function must be considered in addition to
the block cycle time. Since the acknowledgement time is userspecific it can be
specified here for each G function individually.
For blocks with auxiliary function output without transfer stop", the feedrate can be
adjusted blockbyblock by the CNC in such a way that no fluctuations in speed
arise while waiting for acknowledgement, even for a block execution time of
T = block cycle time + P 6806.
An adjustment of the preset value (0.03) is not normally necessary.
P 6807 Address of the programmed block transition speed
[−] −
Input of an address with which a desired block transition speed can be

programmed in the part program. Parameter P 6802 determines whether the CNC
then uses the programmed or the internally calculated block transition speed (see
P 6801)!
All addresses not yet used are permitted (see also P 9909, P 4007, P 2001, P 102).
The address entered here must be parameterised as type 10" in set P 9000!
− 115 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
P 7000 Spindle parameters
Machine parameters

Spindle operating modes:
The spindle can be operated in 3 modes:
1. Spindle without position servo control or measuring system feedback loop
2. Spindle without position servo control but with measuring system feedback loop
3. Spindle with position servo control and measuring system feedback loop.
Here without position servo control" means that the CNC outputs a voltage to the
relevant setpoint output which is only affected by the programmed value for the
speed of a set gear range and the spindle potentiometer, and not by a measuring
system feedback loop ( =controlled spindle).
Re 1.: Depending on the gear range selected, the CNC system outputs a voltage
proportional to the programmed S value as the command value for
speed. No measuring system feedback loop is present. This operating
mode is described below as controlled".
Re 2.: With 2 exceptions, this operating mode corresponds to that described in
1: the measuring system is evaluated during thread cutting and during
programming in mm/rev.
Re 3.: In this operating mode, a distinction is made between 2 states:
‘ The spindle runs under control, with a command value for speed
(0 also possible).
‘ The spindle runs or remains stationary under position servo control.
The position servo control is only closed for the SPINDLE ORIENTA
TION" and SPINDLE STOP" functions. This means that the running
spindle is first controlled and braked to a particular speed, and the
position servo control is then closed. The transition between braking
and the closure of the position control cycle is continuous. Below a
certain (specified) speed, loop gain can now be increased, thereby
enhancing the rigidity of the spindle at rest.
The position servo control is opened as soon as the spindle’s speed of
rotation is defined (this corresponds to the controlled state").
IMPORTANT
‘ Parameter set 7000 takes priority over all other parameters relating to the
spindle axis (except for those in parameter set 7000).
‘ The ROD encoder must be mounted on the spindle (if the encoder is fitted to
the motor, see P 7035 and P 7036).
‘ The measuring system resolution for the spindle corresponds to a value of
1000 pulses/revolution.
‘ In order to ensure that diagnostic programs D22 (axis oscilloscope) and D24
(axis optimisation) are correctly displayed and function correctly, the value in
P 7022 should be assigned to P 104, and the value in P 7024 to
P 105.
‘ Parameter set 7000 is only displayed if the NO SPINDLE" option is not ap
plied (CC220), or the Spindle without feedback" or Spindle with feedback"
option is applied (Type1 osa).
‘ The SPINDLE UNDER CONTROL" and SWITCHING SPINDLE RESOLU
TION" options assume that the spindle is equipped with position servo con
trol.
− 116 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7001 Spindle axis Range of values: CC 220: 1−8

Type1 osa: 1−5
[−] 4
Parameter 7001 defines a system axis as a spindle axis.
IMPORTANT
In parameter 102, the S" address should only be assigned to the axis specified
here. If no spindle axis is defined, NO SPINDLE" must be applied.
Any axis input/output of any SERVOi card (CC220) can be allocated to this system
axis via P9502. Ensure, however, that the 7th SERVOi output can only be used for a
spindle without measuring system feedback loop (see P7002 and 7018).
P 7002 Speed at the moment the position servo loop is closed (− 1 = no position servo control)
Range of values: P7021 − 32767 (for Type1 osa : −1, if Spindle without feed
back" present)
[−] 200
A value between P 7021 and 32767 specifies the operating mode of the spindle as
position servo control with measuring system feedback loop".
After M5, Spindle orientation" (see also P 7013), M30/M02 or Reset, the spindle is
braked. If the speed of the spindle reaches the value of P 7002, the controlled
spindle enters a controlled state. Within this state, the rigidity of the spindle can be
increased by means of P 7020 and P 7019. If NO" is assigned to P 7018, P 7002
must be set to −1.
IMPORTANT
The entry in P 7002 must be greater than the value of P 7027!
Note on setting: Spindle stop (M5)
‘ Set P 7002 to 100 rpm.

For larger (e.g. turning machine) spindles, it may be necessary to set lower
values for the parameters in P 7002.
In the case of smaller spindles, or where the main drive mechanism is very
rigid, P 7002 can be increased (advantages in spindle orientation).
P 7003 Number of gear ranges Range of values: CC 220: 1−8

Type1 osa: 1 − 5
[−] 1
The input specifies the number of reduction stages present. A maximum of

8 reduction stages are available (note P 7017!)
IMPORTANT
If the 2nd spindle is applied, 4 reduction stages are available for each spindle
(see Interface conditions CC220, part 2 − prod.no. 4202−).
− 117 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7004 Minimum spindle speed in rpm Range of values: 0 − 99999.9
[ST1] 0.0 [ST2] 0.0 [ST3] 0.0 [ST4] 0.0

[ST5] 0.0 [ST6] 0.0 [ST7] 0.0 [ST8] 0.0
P 7004 specifies the minimum permissible speed within each reduction stage.
P 7005 Maximum spindle speed in rpm Range of values: P 7004 − 99999.9
[ST1] 9999.9 [ST2] 0.0 [ST3] 0.0 [ST4] 0.0

[ST5] 0.0 [ST6] 0.0 [ST7] 0.0 [ST8] 0.0
P 7005 is used to determine the maximum possible speed within each reduction
stage.
If a certain speed can be attained in two different gear ranges while the automatic
speed range selection" function is active, the NC issues the appropriate M function
(see P 7017) for the lower gear range.
If this is not required, the relevant M function for the gear range must be
programmed before the speed is programmed.
P 7006 Constant spindle speed in rpm Range of values: 0 − 32767
[ST1] 100 [ST2] 100 [ST3] 100 [ST4] 100

[ST5] 100 [ST6] 100 [ST7] 100 [ST8] 100
Parameter P 7006 determines a constant spindle speed in rpm for each reduction
stage.
Where the CONSTANT SPINDLE SPEED" interface signal is highlevel (bit 141,
A 17.5), the speed specified here is output for the appropriate reduction stage.
P 7007 Polarity of comm. voltage with M3 (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE)
[ST1] POSITIVE [ST2] POSITIVE [ST3] POSITIVE [ST4] POSITIVE

[ST5] POSITIVE [ST6] POSITIVE [ST7] POSITIVE [ST8] POSITIVE
See P 7008.
P 7008 Polarity of comm. voltage with M4 (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE)
[ST1] NEGATIVE [ST2] NEGATIVE [ST3] NEGATIVE [ST4] NEGATIVE

Using machine parameters P 7007 and P 7008, the user can define the polarity of
the comm. voltage with M3 (leadscrew on, clockwise rotation) or with M4
(leadscrew on, anticlockwise rotation) as Positive" or Negative".
− 118 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7009 Idling speed in rpm Range of values: 0 − 3276.0
[−] 20.0
Using P 7009, the number of rpm at which the spindle should turn can be specified,
e.g. during a speed range change. The idling speed entered applies for every
change from each gear range, by reference to the max. speed of the highest gear
range.
Idling speed is always output if the indicated gear range does not correspond to the
programmed gear range. The direction of rotation can be determined by signs
(−" =neg. direction of rotation; +" =pos. direction of rotation). P 7004 has no
meaning for P 7009.
P 7010 Amplitude of the superimposed speed Range of values: 0 − 9999.9
[−] 0.0
An additional speed can be superimposed on the idling speed. With the frequency
defined in P 7011, the idling speed then changes by the value specified in P 7010
(see P 7011).
If P 7010 > P 7009, the spindle changes its direction of rotation while it is idling. This
means that sinusoidal idling around a speed" of 0 is possible.
P 7011 Frequency of the superimposed speed Range of values: 0.01 − 100 [1/s]
[−] 0.01
P 7011 determines the frequency with which the speed defined in P 7010 is
superimposed on the idling speed. In this way the idling speed oscillates within a
time of 1/P 7011 between the speeds n = P 7009 + P 7010 and n = P 7009 −
P 7010.
P 7010 Peaktovalley value for

the idling speed
P 7009
1
P 7011
0
t
− 119 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7012 Spindle orientation: Inposition range Range of values: 0 − 360.0

[−] 0.4
The permissible inpos range during Spindle orientation" is defined in parameter
7012. Within this range, the signal Spindle is oriented" is output.
IMPORTANT
The signal SPINDLE UNDER CONTROL" at the highspeed output of the
servocard (SPINDLE UNDER CONTROL" option) can only be output if the spindle
is positioned in the inpos range P 7012 0.4 degrees.
Example:
Input 0.4 : in a band of +
− 0.4 on either side of the 0 marker, the signal Spindle is
oriented" is output.
P 7013 Spindle orientation: M code (0 = not defined) Range of values: 0 − 999

[M] 19
You specify the M function for activating the spindle orientation" function
(optional). Only an unassigned M address may be used as the M code for spindle
orientation.
The function can only be assigned to a servo controlled spindle (see P 7002 and
P 7018). As the function is executed, the spindle potentiometer and the lower
speed limiting values cease to have any effect. By means of this function, the
spindle is normally oriented by reference to the 0 marker (see also P 7028 and
P 7033).
Note on setting: Spindle orientation (for M code see P 7013)
‘ Set P 7029 (orientation speed) e.g. to 100 rpm.
‘ P 7002 (close the position servo control) should, if possible, be somewhat
greater than P 7029 (see also note on setting, Spindle Stop).
The spindle should not come to rest when the position servo loop is closed (check if
necessary with axis oscilloscope). To avoid a stoppage, P 7002 should also be
increased if necessary. In the case of larger spindles or weak main drive
mechanisms, it may be necessary to close the position servo loop at very low
speeds (e.g. 10 rpm).
P 7014 Loop gain value for position servo loop Range of values: 0.001 − 20
[ST1] 1.000 [ST2] 1.000 [ST3] 1.000 [ST4] 1.000
[ST5] 1.000 [ST6] 1.000 [ST7] 1.000 [ST8] 1.000
Parameter P 7014 specifies the loop gain value of the position servo loop for every
single reduction stage.
Note on setting: Spindle stop (M5)
‘ Set P 7014 (loop gain value) to 1.
If the spindle overshoots whilst stopping, reduce the loop gain value until the
spindle comes cleanly to rest.
If rigidity at rest is not sufficient, it can be improved using P 7019 (loop gain
increase factor) and P 7020 (speed for enhancing zerospeed) (e.g. set
P 7020 to between 5 and 10).
− 120 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7015 Slope acceleration (1000 U/s2) Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999
[ST1] 0.010 [ST2] 0.010 [ST3] 0.010 [ST4] 0.010

[ST5] 0.010 [ST6] 0.010 [ST7] 0.010 [ST8] 0.010
Parameter P7015 specifies the acceleration value for the spindle at each reduction
stage (corresponds to the pitch of the output voltage ramp).
P 7005
P 7015 =
60 x T x 1000
T = time until the max. speed of the particular reduction stage is reached (in
seconds), or rise time from 0 to +10 volts.
P 7016 Maximum deviation of the spindle speed in % Range of values: 0 − 100
[−] 20
Parameter P 7016 specifies the maximum valid % by which the spindle speed may
deviate from the command speed.
Example:
Programmed spindle speed S = 1000 rpm
Parameter 7016 :20 %
The actual spindle speed should be at least 800 rpm, at most

1200 rpm. Within this range, the interface signal Spindle up to speed" is output
(I 10.2, bit 83).
P 7017 M code for reduction stage bands Range of values: 40 − 999
[1.B] 40 [2.B] 41
With the aid of parameter P 7017, the M codes for automatic speed band changes
and the gear ranges can be specified.
[1.B] defines the M function by means of which the automatic speed band
change function is selected (in this case, M40). The value [1.B]+ 1 (so
41" in this case) serves also as the code for the lowest reduction stage.
With regard to the automatic selection of gear ranges, see also P 7031.
[2.B] M code for the highest gear range
IMPORTANT
M addresses which have already been allocated within the control should not be
used any longer (e.g. M13, M14, M30). A maximum of 8 gear ranges are permitted.
The value of [2.B] minus the value of [1.B] must be <= 8 and should be entered in P
7003.
− 121 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7018 Feedback (YES/NO)

[−] YES (for Type1 osa : NO, if Spindle without feedback" present)
Parameter P 7018 specifies whether the spindle is to be operated with or without
measuring system feedback. Feedback is necessary for spindles under servo loop
control (P 7002). This also applies to options G33 (thread cutting) and G32 (exact
tapping) and M19 (spindle orientation).
P 7019 Loop gain value’s stop increase factor Range of values: 1 − 100
[−] 1.0
When the spindle is at rest, the loop gain values of the individual reduction stages
(P7014) are multiplied by the value entered (see P 7020). This means that the loop
gain value increases at rest, which in turn increases the spindle’s torsional rigidity.
P 7020 Speed for loop gain increase (rpm) Range of values: 0 − 20

[−] 5
The loop gain stop increase function is activated (P 7019) in the speed range from
spindle stop up to the limit set by P 7020.
P 7021 Speed at which spindle stop" is output (rpm) Range of values: 0 − 100
[−] 5
Between S = 0 and this speed, the interface signal SPINDLE STOP" is output.
Only then is it also possible to perform the resolution switchover for the spindle
(option: SPINDLE RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER").
P 7022 Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev Range of values: 10 − 8000

[−] 1000
The resolution depends on the number of strokes of the encoder which is being
used (e.g. number of strokes 1000/rev.).
Please note the following:
− Max. input frequency (encoder: fmax = 1 MHz)
− Max. encoder speed
− At the upper limit, 32767 pulses/clock unit may be counted
(for more information on clock units, see P 9901).
Example:
Calculating the max. number of pulses/clock unit:
f = 100 kHz
Clock unit (P 9901):10 ms = 0.01 s
Taking into account the internal quadrupling of pulses, the result is:
100000 pulses/s x 4 x 0.01 s = 4000 pulses/clock unit.
P 7023 Spindle encoder monitoring (YES/NO)

[−] YES
Activates or deactivates the spindle encoder monitoring function.
− 122 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7024 Measuring system evaluation in pulses/increment Range of values: 0.025 − 24.999
[−] 1.000000
The evaluation depends on the number of strokes of the encoder which is being
used, and on the resolution. The value entered here should also be entered in
P 105.
Calculation formula:
No. of strokes [pulses/rev]

P 7024 =
Resoluation [incr./rev]
Example:
Encoder: 1000 pulses/rev 1000 pulses/rev= 1.0 pulses
P 7024 =
Resolution: 1000 Incr./rev 1000 incr./rev incr.
P 7025 Measuring system direction (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE)
[−] NEGATIVE
P 7026 Polarity of the spindle servo output (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE)

The polarity of the spindle servo output for each reduction stage can be
established using P 7026. This is a way of compensating for a change in direction
by the main spindle caused by interswitched gearing.
P 7027 Offset drive in rev (lag)
[−] 0.0000
Parameter 7027 corrects the spindle’s drift (speed 0 is programmed, but the
spindle is rotating regardless).
Calculating P 7027:
The adjustment is made in the first speed range. For this purpose, it is important
that P 103 = 3 and P 105 = P 7024 for the spindle axis. After setting the machine
parameters (transfer), diagnostic program D24 (axis optimisation) is activated. The
lag displayed at rest must then be entered manually into P 7027.
IMPORTANT
The entry in P 7027 must be lesser than the value of P 7002!
− 123 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7028 Reference point offset in degrees (spindle) Range of values: −360.0 to +360.0:
[−] 0.0
Parameter 7028 makes it possible to displace" the 0 marker by software control.

The reference point can thus be specified regardless of the 0 marker’s position.
P 7029 Orientation speed for M19 Range of values: 0 − P 7005
[ST1] 100 [ST2] 100 [ST3] 100 [ST4] 100

[ST5] 100 [ST6] 100 [ST7] 100 [ST8] 100
The speed for the spindle orientation" function can be defined for each gear
range. The spindle orientation" function is initiated at this speed (if the servo loop
control function has been closed beforehand; see also P 7002) and executed at
approx. 80 % of the value specified in 7029.
P 7030 Manual spindle speed in rpm Range of values: 0 − P 7005
[−] 0
If the spindle function keys are actuated, the value entered here is output (only if no
speed has been programmed in).
P 7031 Automatic speed range selection (YES/NO)
[−] NO
P 7031 can be used to specify whether the automatic speed range selection"
function should be activated after switching on, or after a control reset or M30.
P 7032 Offset factor for command value in % Range of values: 0.01 − 100
[ST1] 100.0 [ST2] 100.0 [ST3] 100.0 [ST4] 100.0

[ST5] 100.0 [ST6] 100.0 [ST7] 100.0 [ST8] 100.0
P 7032 can be used to limit the max. voltage range separately in each speed range
for spindle control purposes ( +−10 V ). In this way asymmetrical reduction stage
ratios can also be taken into account.
Example:
P 7032 = 100; P 7005 = 5000
If S 5000" is programmed, +10 V is output.
P 7032 = 50; P 7005 = 5000

If S 5000" is programmed, +5 V is output.
IMPORTANT
P 7032 is not used to define spindle speed limiting values. Limit values are
specified by means of the G functions G 192 and G 292.
− 124 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7033 Maximum value for spindle positioning in degrees Range of values: 0 − 99999.9
[−] 359.9
By adding an additional S word after the M code for spindle orientation", the
spindle can be oriented to any position whatsoever. P 7033 specifies the upper
limiting value for this position in the M3 direction.
P 7034 Speed range change via orientation (YES/NO)
[−] NO
P 7034 defines whether a speed range change is initiated from idling or by the
spindle orientation" function. If Yes" is entered, the spindle first travels to the
orientation position (if another speed range is input). Then the new speed range
can be set.
IMPORTANT
This function is only possible with a servocontrolled spindle (please note: P 7002
> 0 and P 7018 YES).
P 7035 Transmission ratio spindle/motor (sensor on motor) Range of values: 1 − 10
[ST1] 1 [ST2] 1 [ST3] 1 [ST4] 1

[ST5] 1 [ST6] 1 [ST7] 1 [ST8] 1
P7035 specifies the reduction ratio of motor speed to spindle speed. This
parameter is required whenever the sensor is fitted to the motor rather than to the
spindle. Where input >1 see P 7036.
Example:
Spindle rotates at 1000 rpm if motor speed = 6000 rpm.
Entry: 6
IMPORTANT
Only evenorder speed reduction ratios are valid, up to max. 10:1!
P 7036 Search speed in rpm Range of values: 0.1 − 100
[−] 0.0
Speed of Search for external reference point".

If a value 1 is input in P 7035 (encoder mounted on motor), the 0 marker is also
overshot more than once during one rotation of the spindle. This means that a
special traverse to reference point is necessary for firsttime orientation following
acceleration, reset or a speed range change.
The reference point is determined by means of the external signal Spindle in
position" and the spindle encoder’s marker. For this reason, the external signal is
sent to the controller via fast input 1. The approach to reference point is made at the
speed specified in P 7036.
− 125 −
Type1 osa /CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7037 Deleting the reference point when changing speed range (YES/NO)
[−] NO
P 7037 determines whether the reference point should be deleted after the speed
range has been changed (either from idling or by reorientation). A new search for
the 0 marker must be initiated if YES is entered.
− 126 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 7100 Parameters for 2nd spindle
Machine parameters
P 7100 Parameters for 2nd spindle
IMPORTANT
The 2nd spindle can only be selected in conjunction with Type1 osa T and
CC220 T.
Parameters of parameter set P 7100 are only displayed in the case of applied
option 2nd spindle". They parameterise the 2nd spindle, which is treated in the
same way as the 1st spindle in terms of functionality; if the second spindle is
applied, however, both spindles only have 2 speed ranges each.
The conditions for P 7101 to P 7137 are the same as those for P 7000.
The inputs of MPP 7103, 7113 and 7117 are dependent on the hundred set
specified in P 7139.
P 7138 Inposition range: Controlled spindle stop (Range of values: 0 − 360.0)
[−] 0.4
Specify the range (in degrees) in which the 2nd spindle must finish after a cycle. In
this way the positioning accuracy of the spindle is determined.
P 7139 M code offset for M3, M4, M5, M13, M14, (100 set) (Range of values: 1 to 9)
[−] 1
The above M codes are addressed specially for the 2nd spindle with the entered
hundred set.
Example: Parameterising with 5"
Inputting M503 affects the 2nd spindle −−u2nd spindle clockwise rotation
− 127 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 7200 Exact tapping
Machine parameters
P 7200 Exact tapping (optional)

A spindle with feedback loop (P 7018) and position servo control (P 7002) must be
applied for Exact tapping". With the CC220 T or Type1 osa T, the 2nd spindle"
option is necessary as well for Exact tapping".
Since a free allocation between system axis and axis inputs/outputs is possible via
P 9502, take special care to ensure that the spindle and all drilling axes (see also
P 6507) are connected to the same servo card (SERVOi)!
Before tapping is started, the spindle position servo control must be closed (by
programming M5 or SPINDLE ORIENTATION). Before the G32 block is executed,
there is an internal period of waiting for an inposition" signal from all axes involved
(inposition drilling axis: P1508. Inposition spindle: P7012). P7203 and P7204 can
be calculated using the D28 TAPPING" diagnostic program. For descriptions of
diagnostic programs and advice on commissioning the options, see manual
Diagnosis CC220/320". For information on exact tapping, see also programming
manual (G32).
P 7201 Spindle loop gain factor in (1000 degrees/min)/degrees Range of values: 0.001 − 10.000
[ST1] 0.03 [ST2] 0.03 [ST3] 0.03 [ST4] 0.03
[ST5] 0.03 [ST6] 0.03 [ST7] 0.03 [ST8] 0.03
The loop gain value for each reduction stage should be set in such a way that the
spindle does not oscillate when running at the max. speed at which threads can be
drilled.
P 7202 Spindle acceleration in 1000 rps2 Range of values: 0.001 − 99.999

[ST1] 0.05 [ST2] 0.05 [ST3] 0.05 [ST4] 0.05
[ST5] 0.05 [ST6] 0.05 [ST7] 0.05 [ST8] 0.05
The values from parameter P 7015 may be transferred.
P 7203 Feed forward velocity coefficient Range of values: 0 − P 1014
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
The values for P7203 and P7204 are automatically entered in the machine
parameter data block after precontrol evaluation has been set using D28, by
means of the TRANSFER softkey (in D28). They are then always effective after
acceleration of the control.
IMPORTANT
In order that the values automatically transferred in L444 are also displayed, firstly
delete file L444 after transfer via D28 and then reopen with texts.
P 7204 Feed forward acceleration coefficient Range of values: 0 − P 1015
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
The values for P7203 and P7204 are automatically entered here after feed forward
evaluation has been set using diagnostic program D28 by means of the
TRANSFER (in D28). The set values are always effective after acceleration of the
control.
− 128 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 7500 Turning machine
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
The Turning machine" machine parameter group is only valid in conjunction with
Type1 osa T and CC220 T.
P 7501 Number of compensation sets Range of values: 1 − 99

[−] 36
NOTE
If the entry for P 7510 is changed, all compensation tables, zero offset tables, ge
ometry data and working plan data are deleted!
P 7502 LX word format

[−] 43
P 7503 LZ word format

[−] 43
Parameters P 7502 and P 7503 describe the input format for the LX and LZ or DX
and DZ tool compensation factors.
43 means 4 integer digits and 3 post decimal positions.
P 7504 Maximum permissible wear input

[−] 2.000
The entry in parameter P 7504 limits the maximum input value of the DX and DZ
wear compensation factors per input. If there are repeated entries in the wear table,
these are added up incrementally.
P 7505 Maximum permissible wear value

[−] 9.999
If a DX or DZ wear value exceeds the value stipulated here, the warning: wear" is
issued.
P 7506 (currently not in use)
P 7507 Collision test with tool nose radius compensation (YES/NO)

[−] YES
If NO" is input, all programmed positions are traversed even if no point of

intersection is present. If this happens, the contour could be destroyed.
− 129 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7508 Size of the graphics work file in bytes (currently not used)
[−] 0
This parameter determines the total size of the memory location for the geometry
list (number of geometric elements) and NC data. This total can be distributed over
the two areas in various ways. This distribution is carried out in the configuration
data" of the graphic programming (WOP).
NOTE
If the entry for P 7508 is changed, all compensation tables, zero offset tables, geo
metry data and working plan data are deleted!
P 7509 Max. feed threading (m/min) Range of values: 0 − P 501

[1.A] 3.000 [2.A] 3.000
In order to be independent of parameter P1003, this parameter determines a

maximum feedrate specially for threading operations;
max. feedrate = speed x threading pitch for every feed axis.
P 7510 Number of compensation sets for cutting tool Range of values: −1 = free allocation,
0 <P 7510 <P 7501
[−] −1
Example 1:
−1 = free allocation
As many compensation sets for milling and turning tools as desired may be set,
and any sequence specified, within the limits (1 ... P 7501).
Example 2:
0 <P 7510 <P 7501
Fixed allocation of turning and milling tools; e.g. P 7510 = 10, P 7501 = 32.
‘ Compensation sets 1 ... 22 for turning tools.
‘ Compensation sets 23 ... 32 for milling tools.
Following special cases:

P 7510 = 0
‘ Compensation sets for turning tools only
P 7510 = P 7501
‘ Compensation sets for cutting tools only
NOTE
If the entry for P 7510 is changed, all compensation tables are deleted. The active
table is formally preserved, but all the compensation values are deleted.
− 130 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7511/P7512 Display area for NC block simulation
The onscreen display if of optimum size, adapted to the size of the machine’s
working area.
P 7511 DISPLAY AREA NC BLOCK SIMULATION POSITIVE IN MM

The preset value for every axis is 9999.999" mm.
Valid input: −20000 < input value < 20000
Example:
[ X ] 150.000 [ Z ] 150.000 [ Y ] 300.000
P 7512 DISPLAY AREA IN NC BLOCK SIMULATION IN MM

The preset value for every axis is −9999.999" mm.
Valid input: −20000 < input value < P7511.
Example:
[ X ] −150.000 [ Z ] −150.000 [ Y ] −300.000
The limits of the display range of the X and Y coordinates when representing
workpiece coordinates result from the max. possible radius which can be shown in
the set display area.
P 7513 Processing milling in the negative X range (YES/NO)
You define the position of the tool holder for the powered tool when processing the
face of the workpiece. This parameter is only effective if the interpolation function
(transit function) for the face is active. Basic setting = NO.
[−] NO
Workpiece face with range definition
ÉÉ ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉ
− Range + Range
The powered tool
is working
in the positive Xrange
−X +X
− 131 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7514 Potentiometer 100% − only when interface signal is set (YES/NO)
This parameter relates to feed, rapid feed and spindle potentiometers.
[−] NO
Basic setting = NO. The torque setting is suppressed and the override value
automatically set to 100 % if the interface signals set feed/rapid potentiometer to
100 %" or spindle override 100 %" are active. Status remains modal until the
potentiometer value is altered manually.
[−] YES
The current potentiometer status is active also if the IF signals potentiometer

feed/rapid potentiometer to 100 %" or spindle override 100 %" are deactivated
(signal change high/low). Teaching of new F and S values is not possible in this
potentiometer mode.
P 7515 M code for spindle synchronisation
[AN] 65 [AUS] 66
This input determines the M code which influences the synchronisation between
the 1st and 2nd spindles, and deactivates the synchronisation.
M codes allocated internally by the control are not valid: e.g. M0 to M6, M13, M14
and M codes defined in P 4015, P 7013, P 7017, P 7605, P 7113, P7117, P7139,
P 7606, and P 7607.
P 7516 Program no. for finishing measuring steps (0 to 999999999)
[−] 90004
At the end of a measuring section during finishing, the subprogram*) defined under
this program no. is called. If 0" is entered here, the warning NO PROGRAMNO.
PRESENT is output when the NC block is generated in WOP.
*) The programm P90004 is normally supplied.
− 132 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7517 / 7518
Explanation of P7517/P7518:
Special customerspecific functions, available without activation of a special

application bit, are parameterised via parameter fields P7517 and P7518.
P7517/P7518 each contain 32 integer or real variables. The parameters are all
preassigned with 0. In order to activate or parameterise the special functions, the
respective parameters must be set by the user.
The meaning of the individual values is dependent on the respective customer
specific functions. The following functions are currently available:
1. Radius programming
With a turning machine, P7517 [1] is used to program the Xaxis with diameter
values or radius values.
P7517 [1] 1 Radius programming

P7517 [1] 0 Diametrical programming (preassignment)
After activation of radius programming, bear in mind the following concerning

absolute programming and offsetting of wear compensation for turning tools:
Radius programming Diametrical

programming
P 7517 [1] 1 P 7517 [1] 0
Absolute programming Xaxis traverses pro Xaxis traverses half pro
G90 grammed path grammed path
Cutting tool wear DX The position of the X The position of the X
axis is corrected by DX axis is corrected by DX/2
The position display of the Xaxis is not doupled again after activation of radius
programming.
P 7517 Options range 1

P7517 values
[1] Radius programming"
Selection of diameter or radius programming 0−1
[2]..[32] not used 0
P 7518 Options range 2

P7518 values
[1]..[32] not used 0.000
− 133 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 7600 Caxis parameters
Machine parameters
P 7600 Caxis parameters (optional)
IMPORTANT
The SPINDLE UNDER CONTROL" and SPINDLE RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER"
options cannot be implemented if a Caxis is being used.
This option allows the spindle of a turning machine to be switched by means of

software to behave as a synchronous rotary axis. In conjunction with an
asynchronous axis used for the speed control of a powered tool, the turning
machine can also perform milling on the end face or the lateral surface of a
workpiece. Corresponding systems axes are allocated to
− the spindle (per P 7001, P 7602, P 7603)
− the Caxis (per P 7601) and
− the powered tool (per P 7604)
in the machine parameters.
The following applies to the parameterisation of these system axes:
‘ The spindle and the powered tool are applied respectively as asynchronous
axes (P 101 / P 102).
‘ The Caxis is applied as a synchronous axis of ROTARY type under address
C" (P101 / P102 / P107).
IMPORTANT
Since a free allocation between system axis and axis inputs/outputs of the SERVO
icards is possible via P 9502, ensure that the system axes to which the spindle,
Caxis or powered tool were allocated are connected to the same servo card if the
Caxis option is applied! In the Type1 osa T allocation between system axis and
axis inputs/outputs is only possible on a Type1 osa module.
Since either spindle operation or Caxis operation is active at a given point, the
following combinations with regard to the allocation between system axes and
functionality are possible:
‘ separate system axes for spindle, Caxis and powered tool:
all set value outputs and measuring system inputs are separated. Used in the
case of 2 different motors and measuring systems for spindle and
Caxis.
‘ separate system axes, joint input and/or output for spindle and Caxis, own
system axis for driven tool: all set value outputs and measuring system inputs
are separated internally by the control in their defined axis behaviour and
their DRIVE ON logic, as when 2 motors are used. If a joint motor is used for
spindle and Caxis, it is possible, via P 7603, to set the setpoint output of the
spindle axis to the setpoint output of the Caxis (P 7603 = P 7601). Similarly, if
one joint measuring system is used for the spindle and the Caxis, it is pos
sible, via P 7602, to set the measuring system input of the spindle axis to the
measuring system input of the Caxis (P 7602 = P 7601).
− 134 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
‘ joint system axis for spindle and driven tool, own system axis for Caxis: all set
value outputs and measuring system inputs are separated internally by the
control. It is possible, however, to use the setpoint output of the spindle also
as an output for the powered tool via P 7604. In this case, however, the ap
propriate hardware output of the SERVOi (CC220) or osa module (Type1
osa) must be switched to the spindle motor or the motor of the powered tool
via a relay when switching between cutting operation and turning operation.
Machine parameter settings in conjunction with Caxes:
P 101 / P 102: The Caxis is defined as a synchronous axis with address C".
P 104: As max. 8000 pulses/rev. can be input in P 104, a value of 0 should be

entered for encoders with a number of strokes exceeding 8000.
P 105: Encoder pulses / revolution

P 105 =
360 degree
x resolution
Example for setting P 105:
An 18000 stroke encoder supplies e.g. after the pulses have been quintupled (in
the encoder itself!) 90000 pulses/rev (−> P104=0 !). The resolution should
amount to 0.001 (P103=3).
90000 pulses/degree
= 0.25 pulses/incr. −> P105 = 0.25
360 degree/rev x 1000 incr./deg
P 106: The system axis of the powered tool must be set to NO" if the spindle axis is
separate from the axis of the driven tool.
P 107: The system axis of the Caxis must be defined as ROTARY" type.
P 501 to P 508 / P 511: Entries for the speed definition must be in 1000 o/min .
Example for calculation of rpm in degrees/min:
80 rpm =80 * 360 degrees/min = 28800 degrees/min = 28.8 * 1000 degrees/min
P 1001: If the same motor is to be used for the spindle and the Caxis and the
Caxis encoder is to limit the speed, this must be taken into account by calculating
the corresponding input value in P1001 (nominal loop gain) (when entering Caxis
system axis). In all other cases, the loop gain is defined − as described under P
1001.
Example: 1 motor, 2 encoders

Max. spindle speed in this speed range: 500 rpm
Maximum operating frequency of the encoder (speed limit): 80 rpm
Desired nominal loop gain of the Caxis: 1
1 * 80 rev/min.
P 1001: = 0.16
500 rev/min.
− 135 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
There are two ways to switch between spindle operation and Caxis operation.
If the switchover takes places with the spindle at rest, the spindle is stopped before
switching to axis operation. Then the Caxis traverses to the reference point. This
alternative is defined in parameters P7605, P7606 and P7607.
For onthefly Caxis switching, also known as fast switching, the switchover to
Caxis operation takes place at full speed. The zero marker of the Caxis encoder is
recorded even during the braking process. The Caxis is not positioned at the
reference point, but remains at whichever position it may come to rest at after
braking (0359.999°). This alternative is defined in parameters P7608, P7609 and
P7610.
P 7601 Caxis position number

[−] 4
The system axis defined here for the Caxis logic must be applied in P101 or P102
as a synchronous axis with address C".
The system axis entered may not be assigned elsewhere (e.g. as a spindle axis).
P 7602 Number of spindle measuring system input

[−] 5
must be entered to match P 7601 if one measuring system is used for spindle and
Caxis. If separate measuring systems are in use, enter here the system axis
(P7001) assigned with the spindle.
P 7603 Spindle analog output position number

[−] 5
must be entered to match P 7601 if one motor is used for spindle and Caxis. If
separate motors are in use, enter here the system axis (P7001) assigned with the
spindle.
− 136 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7604 Axis number of the powered tool (0 = no powered tool)

[−] 6
Allocate a system axis to the powered tool in Caxis operation. The powered tool is
then controlled by the SERVOi (CC220) or osa module (Type1 osa) output
assigned to this system axis in P9502. A voltage in the range 0V to +/− 10V is
output in proportion to the programmed speed value.
If the spindle and the powered tool are to use the same output (the same system
axis), the system axis number of the spindle must be entered here. In this case,
however, the appropriate hardware output of the SERVOi must be switched to the
spindle motor or the motor of the powered tool via a relay when switching between
milling operation and turning operation.
IMPORTANT
‘ Define the maximum programmable speed in P 501.
‘ The output voltage and therefore the speed are changed by the feed poten
tiometer.
‘ Behaviour during acceleration is defined in parameter set 1000.
‘ The type of programming (internal via NC / external via PLC) is determined by
P112. Internal programming can be carried out in the NC program or by
manual input. The set value 0V is output with M30.
‘ In the case of external programming, the axis is addressed as if it were an
asynchronous axis.
‘ The axis" can be jogged.
‘ The speed (spindle speed in this case) can be selected via the speed switch
(see P505 to P508 for information on speeds).
‘ The system axis defined as powered tool takes part in the block search if pro
gramming is internal (only CC 220 T, Type1 osa T).
‘ No reduction stages are implemented in conjunction with the powered tool.
P 7605 M code for changeover to milling with approach to reference point

[−] 51
The M code for switching from spindle operation (turning) to Caxis operation
(milling) can be freely assigned. Here a selection may be made between switching
with or without a following reference point approach of the Caxis (see
P 7606).
The following M codes are not permissible:
M0 to M6, M13, M14 and the M codes defined in P 7013, P 7017, P 7606 and
P 7607.
P 7606 M code for changeover to cutting without approach to reference point

[−] 52
See P 7605.
IMPORTANT
P 1510 must in this case be set to NO".
− 137 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 7607 M code for changeover to turning

[−] 50
The M code for switching from Caxis operation (milling) to spindle operation
(turning) can be freely assigned. The following M codes are not permissible:
M0 to M6, M13, M14 and the M codes defined in P 7013, P 7017, P 7605 and
P 7606.
P 7608 M code onthefly switching to cutting with reference point

[−] 57 Range of values 0 − 999
The M code for onthefly switching from spindle operation (turning) to Caxis
operation (milling) can be freely assigned.
The following M codes are not permissible:
M0 to M6, M13, M14 , M19, M40 − M48 and all other userdefined M codes.
IMPORTANT
After onthefly switchover to milling operation, the Caxis could be in any position
whatsoever. This must be taken into account when generating part programs.
P 7609 M code rapid switchover to turning

The M code for fast switching from Caxis operation (milling) to spindle operation
(turning) can be freely assigned.
The following internal M codes are not valid:
M0 to M6, M13, M14 , M19, M40 − M48 and all other userdefined M codes.
P 7610 Max. possible speed re. Caxis encoder and maximum operating frequencies
Parameter P7610 defines the maximum spindle speed possible when determining
the zero marker of the Caxis encoder during switchover (switchover with
M code from P7608 to Caxis operation). This speed is dependent on the maximum
operating frequency of the encoder and the maximum input frequency of the servo
card used. At this speed, the maximum operating frequency of the Caxis encoder
and the maximum operating frequency of the servo card used must not be
exceeded.
IMPORTANT
Entering 0 in parameter P 7610 means that the rapid speed of the Caxis will be
taken as the maximum possible speed.
− 138 −
P 8500 DNC interface with Type1 osa / CC 220
simple protocol Machine parameters
P 8500 DNC interface with simple protocol (optional)
IMPORTANT
The machine parameter group DNC interface with simple protocol" is valid only in
conjunction with CC220.
The V.24/20 mA interface can be plugged into the I/O, bit coupling or word coupling
card (optional). The same interface module can be used for LSV2DNC (P 8600).
The machine parameters are is only displayed if the DNC interface with simple
protocol" option is applied. The options DNC interface with simple protocol",
DNC interface with LSV2 protocol" and FMS communications interface with
BAB" are mutually exclusive.
P 8501 Baud rate:
[−] 9600
Valid transmission speeds are 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000,
2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200 baud.
P 8502 Stop bits Inputs: 1, 1.5, 2
[−] 1.0
This parameter can be used to adapt to the appropriate storage medium.
P 8503 Software handshake (YES/NO)
[−] YES
Parameter P 8503 specifies whether the transfer of data takes place with a
software handshake" or a hardware handshake". The SOFTWARE CONTROL"
function has no effect on the DNC interface.
YES = Software handshake
NO = Hardware handshake
P 8504 Timeout period in secs. Range of values: 0 − 127 (0: no timeout check)
[−] 10
The transfer of protocols is timed out.
If no telegram can be sent within the specified time, or if an interrupt is detected
during transmission (receiving station not ready) which lasts longer than the time
period specified in P 8504, the error message DNC timeout" is displayed. The
transmission is aborted.
P 8505 Number of data bits per character (7 or 8)
[−] 8
P 8506 Parity (0 = none, 1 = even, 2 = odd) (0/1/2)
[−] 1
P 8506 determines whether or not a parity check is carried out on every character
transmitted. If yes, a choice can be made between even or odd parity (0 = no parity;
1 = even parity; 2 = odd parity).
− 139 −
simple protocol Machine parameters
P 8507 Automatic status messages to the DNC computer (YES/NO)
[−] YES
YES: Sending status messages is permitted.
NO: Sending status messages is not permitted. Error messages to the
DNC computer are diverted to the CNC panel and displayed as
DNC faults".
− 140 −
LSV2 protocol Machine parameters
P 8600 DNC interface with LSV2 protocol (optional)
IMPORTANT
The machine parameter group DNC interface with LSV2protocol" is valid only in
conjunction with CC220.
The V.24/20 mA interface can be plugged into the I/O, bit coupling or word coupling
card (optional). The same interface module can be used for simple DNC (P 8500).
The machine parameters are only displayed if the DNC interface with LSV2
protocol" option is applied.
The options DNC interface with simple protocol", DNC interface with LSV2
protocol" and FMS communications interface with BAB" are mutually exclusive.
IMPORTANT
‘ The data format is fixed at 8 bits per character.
‘ If the Serial coupling processor card" (SCP card) in CC220 is in use, certain
differences must be noted from the standard DNC interface on the I/O, bit
coupling or word coupling cards. The individual deviations are flagged in the
machine parameter descriptions in P 8601 and P 8607. See also P 9913 for
more information on the SCP card.
P 8601 Baud rate
[−] 9600
Valid transmission speeds are 50, 75, 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000,
2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 and 19200 baud.
SCP card:
When the SCP card is used, additional parameters can be set for baud rates of 38,4
kbd and 57,6 kbd.
P 8602 Stop bits (1, 1.5, 2)
[−] 1.0
This parameter can be used to adapt to the appropriate storage medium.
P 8603 Parity (0 = none, 1 = even, 2 = odd) (0/1/2)
[−] 1
P 8506 determines whether or not a parity check is carried out on every character
transmitted. If yes, a choice can be made between even or odd parity (0 = no parity;
1 = even parity; 2 = odd parity).
− 141 −
LSV2 protocol Machine parameters
P 8604 Maximum telegram length (number of characters) Range of values: 120 − 248
[−] 248
In P 8604, the maximum length of a telegram can be specified. A telegram always

consists of a telegram identifer which is 6 characters long, and a variable user data
component. The CNC can process telegrams with a length of up to 248 characters.
P 8605 NC priority in the event of a collision (YES/NO)
[−] YES
A collision may be expected if an ENQ" is received after an ENQ" is transmitted,

rather than the expected DLE0". The station with the higher priority ignores the
received ENQ", the station with the lower priority relinquishes its send request and
acknowledges with DLE0".
Parameter 8605 = YES: CNC priority

Parameter 8605 = NO: HOST priority
P 8606 Timeout check in sec. (max. resolution 0.5 sec.)
[0] 2.0 [1] 2.0 [2] 2.0
[0]: The receiving station sets the time T0 on receiving the <STX> character. If
the <ETX> character is not received within this time, the receiving station re
turns to its initial state.
[1]: The sending station sets time T1 by transmitting ENQ" and BCC". If no valid
acknowledgement is received from the remote station, the remote station is
asked to send a valid acknowledgement with an ENQ" signal.
[2]: By sending the acknowledgements DLE0" , DLE1" or NAK", the receiving

station sets the control time T2. If no valid reaction is received from the send
ing station within this time, the receiving station reverts to its initial state.
P 8607 SCP interface (1 = X11 (V24/RS 422), 2 = X12 (V24/20 mA)
[−] 1
P 8607 specifies which interface on the SCP card should be used for the
LSV2DNC.
1: Interface X11 (V24 and RS 422)

2: Interface X12 (V24 and 20 mA)
− 142 −
P 8700 FFS communications interface Type1 osa / CC 220
with BAB Machine parameters
P 8700 FMS communications interface with BAB (optional)
IMPORTANT
Communication interface with BAB is currently only available in the CC220 !
In contrast to LSV2 DNC, the V.24/20 mA interface is not used for BAB DNC, but the
special BAB interface module is used instead. This module is plugged into the I/O,
bit coupling or word coupling card instead of the V.24/20 mA interface card.
The machine parameters are only displayed if the FMS communications interface
with BAB" option is applied. The options FMS communications interface with
BAB" , DNC interface with simple protocol" and NC interface with LSV2 protocol"
are mutually exclusive.
NOTE
The parameters of the 8700 group should only be changed with the agreement
of the Bosch Service Department.
P 8701 TSU timeout in sec. (T1−4, Tx)

Range of values [1−4] : : 0 to 127
Range of values [X]: 1 to 255
[−] 1 [X] 10
Parameter P 8701 specifies the control times T1 to T4 in [1−4]. The control for time
Tx can be separately defined in [X].
P 8702 TSU repeats (WDMAX, ... , WIMAX) Range of values: 0 − 127
[−] 3
The number of maximum repeats (WDMAX, WSMAX, WEMAX, WIMAX) can be

specified in P 8702.
P 8703 PG4 coupling (YES/NO)
[−] YES
If the CNC is coupled to the Bosch PG4 programmer over BABNET, parameter
8703 must be set to YES. The entire transfer of data between the two systems will
then take place via TSU channel 1. Other TSU channels are not supported.
Telegrams can be at most 256 bytes long, as communicated in the TSU’s RESTART
telegram. The automatic function for sending error messages to the PG4
programmer is not active if the controller is switched on, or during operation in DNC
mode.
− 143 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 9000 Adress selection
Machine parameters
P 9000 Address selection
NOTE
Changing the parameters P9001 to P9026. All link tables are deleted when the
machine parameters are activated!
In the P 9000 parameter set, a maximum total number of characters (for the string of
digits) and a particular type are allocated to the individual addresses (A−Z).
[FMT] = Total number of characters
[TYP] = Type of address
NOTE
These specifications determine how the CNC processes each address and should
only be changed on the instructions of Bosch service personnel or the tool
manufacturer.
Example:
P 9001 address A" [FMT] 7
A maximum of 7 digits (sum of the integer digits and post decimal positions) can be
programmed after address A".
The specified type defines the string of digits and the internal processing of an
address. 12 types are possible (1−12). The following table gives an overview of the
features of the individual types and the effects on the string of digits and processing
of the address associated with each one.
Typ: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Format int real int real int int real int str
Sign E +/− +/− + + +/− +/− E +/− +/− +/−

R R
Output R yes no yes no no no R yes yes yes
O O
R R
Multiple no no no no yes yes no yes no
address
format check yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes
Explanations:
Format: (Int/real/str) integer, real or string format for the string of digits.
Int: string of digits, consisting of max. digits, without

decimal point.
Real: string of digits with a decimal point.
Str: character sequence − of any length − consisting

of digits only (in integer format).
− 144 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
+/−sign: (+/− or +) There is no need for the programmer to include a

positive sign.
Output: (Yes/No) the value can be output via the NC interface.
Multiple address: (Yes/No) multiple programming of the address within an NC block

is permitted.
Format check: (Yes/No) the input format of the string of digits is checked for va
lidity in the CNC.
IMPORTANT
Type 1/type 9: Any unused addresses can be defined as type 1 or type 9. If
these addresses are then programmed in any case, the system
will issue the message INVALID CHARACTER".
Type 4: Reserved for special applications.
Type 12: Reserved for special applications.
Examples of common type allocations:
Auxiliary functions: Type 2,5,10,11:
Synchronous axes: Type 3:
Asynchronous axes: Type 10:

(internal set input)
Asynchronous axes: Type 5,10,11

(external set input)
NOTE
Changing the parameters P9001 to P9026. All link tables are deleted when the
machine parameters are activated!
− 145 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Valid format and type:
P 9001 Address A"
[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9002 Address B"
[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9003 Address C"
[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9004 Address D"
[FMT] 3 [TYP] 5
P 9005 Address E"
[FMT] 4 [TYP] 5
P 9006 Address F"
[FMT] 6 [TYP] 3
P 9007 * Address G"
[FMT] 3 [TYP] 11
P 9008 Address H"
[FMT] 3 [TYP] 5
P 9009 Address I"
[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9010 Address J"
[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9011 Address K"
[FMT] 9 [TYP] 3
P 9012 * Address L"
[FMT] 7 [TYP] 6
P 9013 Address M"
[FMT] 3 [TYP] 11
* = types should not be changed or modified.
− 146 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 9014 Address N"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 6
P 9015 Address O"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 1
P 9016 * Address P"

[FMT] 9 [TYP] 5
P 9017 * Address Q"

[FMT] 9 [TYP] 5
P 9018 Address R"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9019 Address S"

[FMT] 6 [TYP] 2
P 9020 Address T"

[FMT] 4 [TYP] 5
P 9021 Address U"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9022 Address V"

[FMT] 9 [TYP] 3
P 9023 Address W"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 1 **)
P 9024 Address X"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9025 Address Y"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
P 9026 Address Z"

[FMT] 7 [TYP] 3
* = types should not be changed or modified.

** = in the case of an applied Caxis and powered tool: Type 3".
− 147 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 9500 Axis processors
Machine parameters

IMPORTANT
The 9500 set specifies the parameters for any SERVO i (CC 220) servo cards
present in the CNC. Observe the remarks relating to the parameters for the Type1
osa module (Type1 osa).
P 9501 Number of axis processors

Range of values: CC 220: 1,2
Type1 osa: 1
[−] 1
Number of SERVO i cards present in the CC 220. A maximum of 2 SERVO i cards
can be plugged in. Max. possible number of axes in the CC220 system: 8 axes
Only one axis processor card (osa module) is assigned in the Type1 osa. Max.
possible number of axes in the Type 1 osa control system: 5 axes.
P 9502 Axis assignment to axis processors

Range of values: CC 220: 1,2 or 11−17, 20−27
Type1 osa M/T: 1, 11−15
CC 220 M/T: [1.A] 11 [2.A] 12 [3.A] 13 [4.A] 14

Type1 osa M/T: [1.A] 11 [2.A] 12 [3.A] 13 [4.A] 14
The input can be either singledigit for all axes or doubledigit for all axes.
Singledigit: no. of the SERVO i card

Doubledigit: Tens digit = no. of the SERVO i card
Ones digit = no. of the input/output of the relevant axis on
the card
The tens digit of the number entered defines which SERVO icard (CC 220) the
relevant system axis should be assigned to. SERVO icards in the system are
simply numbered from left to right beginning with 1" (facing the front of the CNC).
The input values must <= P 9501 sein.
The No. of the SERVO i" is always 1, for type1 osa, as only one osa module can be
plugged in per Type1osa control unt.
The ones digit is used to specifically allocate a measuring system input/setpoint

output to the system axis on the corresponding SERVO i card or the Type1 osa
module).
IMPORTANT
‘ It is not possible to assign several system axes to a single input/output.
‘ If a value not equal to 10, 20 or 30 is entered for a system axis, the other sys
tem axes may also only be allocated a value not equal to 10, 20 or 30.
− 148 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
‘ Digital handwheel: The measuring system input selected for the digital hand
wheel in P9512 may not be assigned elsewhere in P9502!
‘ Exact tapping: The spindle axis and all drilling axes must be allocated to the
same SERVOi.
‘ Caxis: The spindle, Caxis and powered tool must be allocated to the same
SERVOi.
‘ 7th SERVOi output: This output can only be used for laser power control,
powered tool (Caxis operation) or a spindle without feedback.
9503 Fine graduation of the axis processors Range of values: 1, 2, 4

CC 220: [AP1] 4 [AP2] 4 [AP3] 4
Type1 osa: [AP1] 2
(AP = Servo i axis processor)

P 9503 specifies how often a Servoi (CC220) or a Type1 osa module (Type1 osa)
should update the position servo loops between two interpolation steps of the IP
(interpolation processor − see P 9901).
Example: [AP1] 4: The first servo i in the system updates its position servo
loops 4 times during interpolation.
IMPORTANT
See P 9513 for setting of the desired type of fine interpolation.
Only parameter [AP1] is valid for Type1 osa.
9504 Fast inputs AP1 Range of values: 0, 1, 3,11 − 18
Type1 osa / CC 220: [1.E] 0 [2.E] 0 [3.E] 0 [4.E] 0

CC 220: [5.E] 0 [6.E] 0 [7.E] 0 [8.E] 0
P 9504 allows various signals to be assigned to the first 8 fast inputs of the first
Servo i (CC220) or the 4 fast outputs of the Type1 osa module (Type1 osa). A
number (signal) defined here should not be assigned in P 9505 or P 9506 as well.
0: No signal assigned to input
1: Input for HIGHSPEED FEED STOP" signal
3: Input for SPINDLE TRAVEL TO HOME POSITION" signal (for encoder of

motor" function). If 3 is assigned to an input, the spindle must be
controlled by the first Servo i as well.
11 −18: Input for GRID SHIFT" signal 1st to 8th axes (CC220). If grid shift signals
of individual axes are assigned to these inputs, the affected axes must
be controlled by the first Servo i (CC220). (Caution: Grid shift function
not applicable!)
11 −15: Input for GRID SHIFT" signal 1st to 5th axis (Type1 osa). If grid shift
signals of individual axes are assigned to these inputs, the affected axes
must be controlled by the Type1 osa module. (Caution: Grid shift
function not applicable!)
− 149 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
9505 Fast inputs AP2 Range of values: 0, 1, 3, 11 − 18 (only CC220)
[1.E] 0 [2.E] 0 [3.E] 0 [4.E] 0

[5.E] 0 [6.E] 0 [7.E] 0 [8.E] 0
P 9505 allows various signals to be assigned to the 8 fast inputs of the second
Servoi. A number (signal) entered here should not be assigned in P 2 or P 9504 as
well.
0: No signal assigned to input
1: Input for HIGHSPEED FEED STOP" signal
3: Input for SPINDLE TRAVEL TO HOME POSITION" signal (for encoder of

motor" function). If 3" is assigned to an input, the spindle must be
controlled by the second SERVO i as well.
11 −18: Input for GRID SHIFT" signal 1st to 8th axis. If grid shift signals of
individual axes are assigned to these inputs, the affected axes must be
controlled also by the second Servoi. (Caution: Grid shift function not
applicable!)
If no second Servoi is fitted, all values must be set to 0".
9506 AP3 fast inputs (currently unused, do not change or modify preset values)
[1.E] 0 [2.E] 0 [3.E] 0 [4.E] 0

[5.E] 0 [6.E] 0 [7.E] 0 [8.E] 0
9507 AP1 fast outputs Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 11 − 18, 21 − 28
Type1 osa, CC 220: [1.E] 0 [2.E] 0 [3.E] 0 [4.E] 0

CC 220: [5.E] 0 [6.E] 0 [7.E] 0 [8.E] 0
P9507 makes it possible for various output signals to be assigned to the 8 fast
outputs of the first Servo i (CC220) or the 4 fast outputs of the Type1 osa module. A
number (signal) defined here should not be assigned in P 9508 or P 9509 as well.
0: No signal assigned to output
1: Output for signal to raise the tool (under tangential tool control)
2: Output for signal to lower the tool (under tangential tool control).
4: Output for SPINDLE RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER" signal. In the case of

P 7005
a High signal, the command value is related to If this signal is
16
assigned to an output, the spindle should also be controlled by the first
Servoi (CC 220) or the Type1 osa module.
5: Output for SPINDLE UNDER CONTROL" signal. When the High signal is
emitted, the spindle is located in the inpos range. Switchover to drive
control is now possible. If this signal is assigned to an output, the spindle
should also be controlled by the first Servoi (CC 220) or the Type1 osa
module.
− 150 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
11−18: Output for inpos signal for axes 1...8. If this signal is assigned to an
output, the affected axis should also be controlled by the first Servoi
(CC220).
Example:
The inpos signal for the third axis should be assigned to the sixth fast
output. −−> Entry under [6.A] : 13"
11 −15: Output for inpos signal 1...5 axis (Type1 osa). If this signal is assigned to
an output, the affected axis should also be controlled by the Type1 osa
module.
21−24: Output for fast range identifier for axes 1...4 (P6200). If this signal is
assigned to an output, the axis monitored by the electronic limit switch
must also be situated on the first Servoi (CC220) or the osa module
(Type1 osa).
9508 AP2 fast outputs Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 11 − 18, 21 − 28 (only CC220)
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0

[5.A] 0 [6.A] 0 [7.A] 0 [8.A] 0
P 9508 makes it possible for various output signals to be assigned to the 8 fast
outputs of the second Servoi. A number (signal) defined here should not be
assigned in P 9507 or P 9509 as well.
0: No signal assigned to output
1: Output for signal to raise the tool (under tangential tool control)
2: Output for signal to lower the tool (under tangential tool control).
4: Output for SPINDLE RESOLUTION SWITCHOVER" signal. In the case of

P 7005
a H signal, the command value is related to . If this signal is
16
assigned to an output, the spindle should also be controlled by the
second SERVOi.
5: Output for SPINDLE UNDER CONTROL" signal. When the HIGH signal is
emitted, the spindle is located in the inpos range. Switchover to drive
control is now possible. If this signal is assigned to an output, the spindle
should also be controlled by the second SERVOi.
11−18: Output for inpos signal for axes 1...8. If this signal is assigned to an
output, the affected axis should also be controlled by the second
SERVOi.
Example:
The inpos signal for the fifth axis should be assigned to the first fast
output. −Entry under [1.A] : 15"
21−24: Output for fast range identifier for axes 1...4 (P 6200). If this signal is
assigned to an output, the axis monitored by the electronic limit switch
must also be situated on the second SERVOi.
− 151 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
9509 AP3 fast outputs (currently unused, do not change or modify preset values)
[1.A] 0 [2.A] 0 [3.A] 0 [4.A] 0
[5.A] 0 [6.A] 0 [7.A] 0 [8.A] 0
9510 Handwheel pulses per increment during evaluation 1:1

[−] 1
This parameter specifies the handwheel pulses per scale division/grid during
evaluation at 1:1 (number of pulses between 2 grid positions).
9511 Axis processor number for digital handwheel input

Range of values: CC 220: 0,1,2
Type1 osa: 1
[−] 1
− CC220M, SW version Z25FJ onwards; CC220T, SW version D25SA onwards −
If a digital handwheel is connected via a SERVO icard (only CC 220) or an osa
module (Type1 osa), specify which card the digital handwheel is connected to.
SERVO icards in the system are simply numbered from left to right beginning with
1" (facing the front).
CC220:
0: No digital handwheel is connected to the SERVOi.
− Connection to the MTB1 I/O is possible −
1: connection to the first SERVOi.
2: connection to the second SERVOi.
Type1 osa:
1: connection to the osa module, if applied.
IMPORTANT
The handwheel does not work for
− G95
− programmable analog outputs and spindles.
Handwheel evaluation is dependent on the setting of the feed potentiometer. Hirth

axes cannot be traversed with the handwheel.
9512 Measuring system input number for digital handwheel

Range of values: CC 220: 1−6
Type1 osa: 1 − 5
CC 220: [−] 6
Type1 osa module 3 or 5: [−] 3 or 5
This entry determines the measuring system input of the CC 220 Servo i card
(terminals X11 to X16) − or Type1 osa module (X41 to X43 (X45)),to which a digital
handwheel is connected.
− 152 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
IMPORTANT
All inputs not assigned to axes can be used for the digital handwheel (condition:
P9511 <> 0). Inputs" are not assigned if the axis inputs are of the analog" or
spindle without feedback" type. During parameterisation of a system axis as
spindle (see P102, P7001, P7602), a measuring system input for the feedback
(encoder) is reserved automatically by the system, if all parameters were
assigned with the values 10" , 20" or 30". This measuring system input of the
spindle may not be parameterised for the connection of a digital handwheel
simultaneously!
If parameters with values not equal to 10, 20 or 30 were assigned in P9502 (manual
allocation between system axis and SERVOi input/output), the measuring system
input for the digital handwheel in parameter 9502 defined via
P 9511 and P 9512 may not be used elsewhere!
Online compensation with digital handwheel
This function makes it possible to carry out an additive compensation of the axis
command position using the digital handwheel. LINEAR and ROUND axes which
are not defined as HIRTH axes (MP108) can be compensated.
The following settings can be made with the PLC interface signal:
O22.0 − O22.7 Coupling of n from 8 axes (CC 220) or 5 axes (Type1osa)

with the digital handwheel and activation/deactivation of
Online compensation".
O15.6−O15.7, O16.0 Incremental evaluation of the handwheel pulse

1,10,100 increment
O7.0−O7.7,O8.0−O8.7 Deletion of the current handwheel compensation and

switch on/off of the compensation value indicator via PLC
(Multimode −2, −3, −4)
I11.4 NC issues the Handwheel comp. active" signal if a

handwheel compensation value is <> 0 or a handwheel
is selected.
The current compensation values are displayed optionally in NC and MDI

operating modes. If the program value display (P121) is inactive, the compensa
tion values are displayed.
A handwheel compensation can also be deleted by G 240 in the part program or in

MDI mode.
IMPORTANT
A currently active handwheel compensation of one or several axes is rejected if the
following conditions are present:
‘ cancellation of the handwheel compensation by the interface
− 153 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
‘ activation of the referencing function via softkey or interface. If an axis has

determined its reference point, the compensation of this axis is reset to zero.
‘ activation of the JOG MODE function via softkey or interface.
‘ active G75 (probe)
‘ activation of the face end interpolation function (CC 220T, Type1 osaT). It is
not possible to accept the handwheel compensation value using G240 or
Multimode −2.
A limit switch check of an axis subject to Online compensation" is carried out in the
form of the output of a P2 error if the axis, including its handwheel compensation
value in addition to the travel limit tolerance, violates its travel limit.
When approaching a fixed position (G74,G76,G174), a calculation is carried out to

determine the compensation of the programmed axis at the time of block
preparation. Use the software (e.g. Mfunction) to confirm that Online compensa
tion" is inactive.
For further information, see the Type1 osa / CC 220 Signal description" manual.
9513 Type of fine interpolation Range of values: 0 = linear, 1 = quadratic, 2 = cubic
[−] 0
With the relevant parameterisation it is possible, by means of moderate" set value

amendments, to influence the behaviour of machines with highly dynamic drives
during speed changes. The feed forward control" option in particular may be
employed more effectively.
The type of fine interpolation affects the calculating time of the axis processors (see
parameter P9901) and consequently the permissible value for the interpolation
time!
Three strategies are available for parameterisation, with which the fine interpolation
of the SERVOi is carried out between two points.
0 = linear fine interpolation

Standard setting. The path between the path points entered by the interpolator is
distributed internally in equal sections (see fine graduation, P 9503). Recommen
dation: For use without the feed forward control" option.
1 = quadratic fine interpolation

The speed between two interpolator points is constantly distributed. Recommen
dation: The acceleration behaviour of the machine is improved, in particular when
the feed forward control" option is used.
2 = cubic fine interpolation

The acceleration between two interpolation steps is constantly distributed.
Recommendation: advantages over quadratic fine interpolation in the area of
acceleration changes.
The machine reacts more smoothly to speed changes in the case of moderate"
acceleration changes. In the case of highly dynamic machines, cubic fine
interpolation can positively influence the smooth running of the machine.
− 154 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
P 9900 System parameters
Machine parameters

NOTE
Changes to this parameter set should only be made after consulting the
Bosch NC Service Department.
P 9901 Interpolation time in ms

Range of values: CC 220: 2 − 14
Type1 osa: 8 − 20 if P9503 = 4
6 − 20 if P9503 =1, 2
[−] 10
The interpolation time can be set in ms using machine parameter P 9901.
This quantity defines how often the axis processor on the SERVO icard or the
Type1 osa module is operated by the interpolation processor (IP). The position
servo clock is derived from the combination of parameters P 9901 and P 9503.
In addition, the servo update affects the times of PIC 250 (only with CC220) with
respect to programming refinement and precision (see P 6011).
Ensure that the value of P 9901 cannot be parameterised to any low value, even
within the permissible range of values. Depending on the number of axes in the
system, the following lower limit values in P 9901 may not be undershot.
Interpolation time settings for CC 220 and CC 220s:
Table 1: Minimum interpolation time P 9901

CC 220 CC 220S 30MHz
Axes
[msec] [msec]
2 4 2
3 4 3
4 5 3
5 6 4
6 7 4
7 8 5
8 8 5
If PIC250 is in use these minimum values are raised by 1ms.
For the correct setting of P 9901, the number of axes per SERVOi (P 9502), the
subdivision of axis processors P 9503, the type of fine interpolation P 9513 and
various options must be taken into account.
For the basic setting of P 9901, take from tables 2 and 3, depending on P 9502 and
P 9513, the shortest possible time interval (in ms) within which a SERVOi can
process a setpoint input from the interpolation processor without taking into
account special options. If several SERVOi’s are being used in the system, the
SERVO icard with the most connected axes is decisive.
− 155 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Table 2: Basic setting P 9901 with 2 axes allocated (P 9502=2)

Axes Linear fine interpol. Square. fine interpol. Cubic fine interpol.
per P 9513=0 P 9513=1 P 9513=2
servo i CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S
[msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec]
1 1,7 1,1 1,8 1,1 1,8 1,1
2 2,6 1,6 2,7 1,6 2,7 1,6
3 3,5 2,1 3,6 2,1 3,6 2,1
4 4,4 2,6 4,5 2,6 4,5 2,6
5 5,2 3,1 5,4 3,1 5,4 3,1
6 6,1 3,6 6,3 3,6 6,3 3,6
Table 3: Basic setting P 9901 with 4 axes allocated (P 9502=4)

Axes
per
servo i CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S
[msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec]
1 3,0 1,9 3,3 2,0 3,4 2,1
2 4,5 2,8 5,0 2,9 5,1 3,0
3 5,9 3,6 6,8 3,8 6,9 3,9
4 7,4 4,4 8,5 4,7 8,7 4,8
5 8,8 5,2 10,3 5,6 10,5 5,8
6 10,2 6,0 12,1 6,5 12,4 6,7
Additional running times (in ms) of various options applied in the system must be
added to the basic setting value for P 9901.
Additional running times where two axes are allocated (P 9502=2) are derived
from the following table:
Table 4: Additional running time for feed forward control where 2 axes are allocated
Synchronous Linear fine interpol. Square fine interpol. Cubic fine interpol.
axes P 9513=0 P 9513=1 P 9513=2
per CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S
servo i [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec]
1 do not use 0,2 0,1 0,2 0,2
2 do not use 0,2 0,2 0,3 0,2
3 do not use 0,3 0,2 0,5 0,3
4 do not use 0,4 0,3 0,6 0,3
5 do not use 0,5 0,3 0,7 0,4
6 do not use 0,6 0,4 0,8 0,4
Table 5: Additional running time for LSEC" where 2 axes are allocated
Axes with tables CC 220 CC 220S
per servoi [msec] [msec]
1 0,2 0,1
2 0,3 0,2
3 0,4 0,3
4 0,6 0,3
5 0,7 0,4
6 0,8 0,5
Table 6: Additional running time for cross compensation" where 2 axes are allocated
1 0,4 0,2
2 0,8 0,4
3 1,2 0,6
4 1,6 0,8
5 2,0 1,0
6 2,4 1,2
− 156 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Table 7: Additional running time for drift compensation" where 2 axes are allocated
Normal axes CC 220 CC 220S
(linear, rotary, endless [msec] [msec]
per servoi
1 0,2 0,2
2 0,3 0,2
3 0,4 0,3
4 0,5 0,4
5 0,6 0,4
6 0,7 0,5
Table 8: Additional running time for fast inpos" where 2 axes are allocated
Axes with inpos CC 220 CC 220S
1 0,2 0,2
2 0,3 0,2
3 0,3 0,2
4 0,3 0,2
5 0,4 0,3
6 0,4 0,3
Table 9: Additional running times where 2 axes are allocated

Options
[msec] [msec]
Exact tapping (with 1 drilling axis)
1 0,7
Fast electronic limit switch
0,5 0,3
Laser power control
0,2 0,1
Digital handwheel on SERVOi
0,1 0,1
Additional running times where four axes are allocated (P 9502=4) are derived
from the following table:
Table 10: Additional running time for feed forward control where 4 axes are allocated
Synchronous
axes
per CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S CC 220 CC 220S
servo i [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec] [msec]
1 do not use 0,4 0,3 0,4 0,3
2 do not use 0,5 0,3 0,7 0,4
3 do not use 0,6 0,4 0,9 0,5
4 do not use 0,8 0,5 1,2 0,7
5 do not use 0,9 0,6 1,5 0,8
6 do not use 1,0 0,7 1,7 0,9
Table 11: Additional running time for LSEC" where 4 axes are allocated
1 0,3 0,2
2 0,6 0,3
3 0,8 0,5
4 1,1 0,6
5 1,3 0,7
6 1,6 0,9
− 157 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Table 12: Additional running time for cross compensation" where 4 axes are allocated
1 0,8 0,4
2 1,6 0,8
3 2,4 1,2
4 3,2 1,6
5 4,0 2,0
6 4,8 2,4
Table 13: Additional running time for drift compensation" where 4 axes are allocated
Normal axes CC 220 CC 220S
(linear, rotary, endless [msec] [msec]
per servoi
1 0,4 0,3
2 0,6 0,3
3 0,8 0,4
4 1,0 0,4
5 1,2 0,5
6 1,4 0,5
Table 14: Additional running time for fast inpos" where 4 axes are allocated
Axes with inpos CC 220 CC 220S
1 0,4 0,3
2 0,5 0,3
3 0,6 0,4
4 0,6 0,4
5 0,7 0,5
6 0,8 0,5
Table 15: Additional running times where 4 axes are allocated

Options
[msec] [msec]
Exact tapping (with 1 drilling axis)
Fast electronic limit switch 2 1,3
Laser power control 1 0,6
Digital handwheel 0,3 0,2
0,1 0,1
Ascertain the correct setting value for P 9901 by adding the respective additional
running times to the basic values in tables 2 and 3 and rounding this value up to the
next integer.
− 158 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Interpolation time settings for Type1 osa:
Table 16: Assignment of the interpolation time for fine subdivision of the axis
processor
Interpolation time in [ms] Subdivision of axis

P9901 processors
12 4
10 4
8 4
10 2
8 2
6 2
6 1
IMPORTANT
Recommended interpolation time settings for following PLC coupling types with
Type1 osa:
for softPIC coupling: P9901 = 10 and P9503 = 2

for bit coupling: P9901 = 8 and P9503 = 2
P 9902 Watchdog (P1: in task changes, P2: in ms)

Range of values: P1: P 9901 − 999; P2: P 9901 to (32767 * P 9901)
[P1] 50 [P2] 100
This parameter specifies the intervals at which the processors P1 (in tasks) and P2
(in ms) mutually check each other.
If no feedback is received within these set intervals, an error message is issued.
NOTE
The value [P2] = 32767 * P9901 deactivates the monitoring!
For CC 220s/30mHz, P 9902 [P1] must have a value of at least 50.
P 9903 Radius tolerance range (G2, G3) in mm Range of values: 0.001 − 1

[−] 0.004
Parameter P 9903 specifies the radius deviation (circular deviation) during circular
interpolation (G2, G3) in mm.
From the start point, end point and radius of the G2/G3 movement, two
independent midpoint values are calculated. If these two computed values differ by
an amount which is less than the tolerance range, then one midpoint (centre) is
generated internally (centre compensation).
If the difference in computed values exceeds this range, an error message is

generated: LZF 2041: invalid circle parameters.
The midpoint compensation can be affected by parameter 9912.
− 159 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 9904 Units of distance in (mic, tenmic, hundredmic, mm, cm, dm, m)

[1.A] MM [2.A] MM [3.A] MM [4.A] MM
By means of P 9904, the unit of measurement for programming and displaying
travel paths (distances) can be specified. If this parameter is changed, the
following parameters must also be taken into consideration:
P 4502: Zero offset limiting values
P 6508: Normalisation of PLC compensation
P 6503: Limits for radius compensation
P 9905: Unit for feed
P 6504: Limits for length compensation
P 9910: Unit for radius value
IMPORTANT
In CC 220 T / Type1 osa T it is only possible to program in mm", otherwise an
internal error will be generated when a call is sent to a compensation table or zero
shift table etc.
P 9905 Unit of measurement for feedrate (hundredmic, mm, cm, dm, m) per minute or per rev.
[−] MM
Parameter P 9905 specifies the unit of feedrate for programming and display.
P 9905 is dependent on P 9906. If, for example, P 9906 = 10, the feedrate unit
(P9905) may only be entered in cm" , dm" or m".
IMPORTANT
The entry affects for instance the function tapping without compensating chuck
(G32)" as the thread pitch is calculated from the ratio of feedrate to spindle speed.
This input affects, amongst others, the exact tapping" function (G32) since here
the thread pitch is calculated from the relationship of feedrate to spindle speed.
P 9906 Feed resolution in mm/min Range of values: 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
[−] 0.1
This parameter determines the feed resolution in mm/min, i.e. the smallest
programmable feed variable is determined in mm/min.
Example:
Input 0.1 : feed resolution in hundredmic/min.
P 9907 Feed resolution in mm/rev Range of values: 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1

[−] 0.001
This parameter determines the feed resolution in mm/rev., i.e. the smallest
programmable feed variable is determined in mm/rev.
P 9908 Decoding of tracer signal (0:−, 1/2:pos./neg., 3:both edges)

[−] 1
The way in which the tracer signal is decoded on the servo card is determined by
parameter P 9908.
Entry: 0 = no decoding 2 = negative edge
1 = positive edge 3 = both edges
− 160 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 9909 Address for angle between polar coordinates Range of values: unused addresses,
cf. P 102 and P 2001
[−] A
Parameter P 9909 specifies the address for the polar coordinates angle. (Name of
angle = A)
P 9910 Unit of measurement for radius value (mic, tenmic, hundredmic, mm, cm, dm, m)
[−] MM
P 9910 specifies the unit of measurement used for the radius during the
programming of polar coordinates (R), and for G2/G3. In addition, P 9910 defines
the unit for interval K in G 28.
P 9911 Channel number for fast feed hold
[−] 1
P 9912 End point tolerance range for circles in mm Range of values: 0.0001 − 9.9999
[−] 0.0010
In the case of circular and helical blocks, a midpoint compensation function

generally ensures that for given coordinates (start point, end point, radius), any
imprecisely programmed end point is approached regardless by shifting the
midpoint of the circle (see P 9903).
P 9912 means that this permanent compensation is only carried out above an
adjustable limit.
Rd
Error message (see P 9903)

P 9903
Centre point correction
P 9912 * 1.42
Programmed data are effective
0
Rd = absolute differential between the radii
Start point − centre point and end point − centre point
IMPORTANT
The value entered should be greater than/equal to the programming refinement
(computing resolution). The programming refinement is affected by P 103 and
P 9904.
P 9913 SCP timeout in ms Range of values: 1 − 9999999 (only CC220)
[−] 1000
P 9913 specifies the intervals of time at which P1 should check the SCP card. If P1
does not receive any feedback from the SCP card, the error message
4773 TIMEOUT: WAITING FOR SCP" appears.
− 161 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
P 9914 Initial setting of logbook number (0 = no automatic init.)

Range of values: 0 − 3000 (999999999:
[−] 0
As the controller accelerates, a logbook is automatically set up and activated if P
9914 contains a logbook file number between 3000 and 999999999.
Input 0" : Logbook is not automatically set up and activated. The ring memories R1
to R4 are set with a quantity of 512 bytes and R5 is set with a quantity of 0 bytes
when the logbook file entered here is set up for the first time.
Further information on the logbook may be found in the manual Diagnosis
CC220/320", prod.no. 4228 under diagnosis program D1 Logbook".
P 9915 MSD file numbers for language switching (0 = none)
[ 1.] 0 [ 2.] 0 [ 3.] 0 [ 4.] 0

[ 5.] 0 [ 6.] 0 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
[ 9.] 0 [10.] 0 [11.] 0 [12.] 0
[13.] 0 [14.] 0 [15.] 0 [16.] 0
[17.] 0 [18.] 0 [19.] 0 [20.] 0
[21.] 0
When switching to another language, up to 21 MSD files (with file set P) in which
MSD texts are contained in another language may be stored in the control (in
EEPROM, EPROM or part program memory), in order that the MSD texts may also
be displayed simultaneously in this language.
Another language may be selected in group operating mode DIAGNOSIS, using
the DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL and CHANGE LANGUAGE softkeys. A maximum of 5
languages (languages 1 to 5) may be selected via softkey in this level. Allocation
between the selected language and the corresponding MSD file is performed
simply according to the language number (all softkeys assigned to a language are
numbered sequentially from left to right) and the file number entered under this
number in P9915.
IMPORTANT
‘ If more than 5 (or 9, 13, 17) languages are available, the OTHERS softkey
may be used to branch into the next lowest softkey level.
‘ When selecting another language (or performing a control reset, CLEAR ALL
LOGIC or BACKUP LOAD), the file entered in P 9915 is searched for firstly in
the part program memory, then in library 1 (EEPROM) and finally in libraries
2,3,4 (EPROM). The first MSD file found is then active. An MSD file with a spe
cified number can only exist once. If an MSD file is located in the part program
memory, then the files in the EEPROM and the EPROM must be blocked with
the same number.
− 162 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
Example:
The following MSD file numbers are entered under P 9915:
[ 1.] 999999980 [ 2.] 999999981 [ 3.] 999999982 [ 4.] 999999983

[ 5.] 999999984 [ 6.] 999999985 [ 7.] 0 [ 8.] 0
6 languages are implemented in the control unit:
CHANGE LANGUAGE
ENGLISH LANGUAGE2 LANGUAGe3 LANGUAGE4 OTHERS
Since more than 5 languages are available in this example, languages 5 and 6 are
only made available when OTHERS is pressed:
CHANGE LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE5 LANGUAGE6
Selection of ENGLISH activated MSD file 999999980

LANGUAGE2 activated MSD file 999999981
P 9916 Operating mode after acceleration

Range of values: 1 = diagnosis, 2 = machine, 3 = NC, 4 = MDI, 5 = data I/O,
6 = compensation
[−] 2
This entry determines the first operating mode available after acceleration" of the
control.
IMPORTANT
It is possible to define the group operating mode entered here for the user in
conjunction with the CNC input signal 6.4 MODE INHIBIT. This makes it impossible
to then switch to another group operating mode.
P 9917 Unit for dwell time in seconds Range of values: 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0
[−] 1.0
According to setting, the F value for dwell time programming G4 is interpreted in
seconds, tenths of seconds, hundreths of seconds or thousandths of seconds.
− 163 −
Type1 osa / CC 220
Machine parameters
− 164 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
6. Index of all parameters

Parameter
A
Acceleration
Commuting acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1005
External via wordcoupled PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1002, P1005, P1008, P1009
Maximum programmable slope acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1009
Minimum programmable slope acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1008
Slope point for path operation in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1003
Slope point for jogging mode in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1004
Slope acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1002
Addresses, definition
Address of the programmed block transition speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6807
Address for angle between polar coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9909
Axis addresses . . P 102, P 122
Addresses A" to Z" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9001 to P 9026
Auxiliary function address (−: means not defined") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2001
Userdefined auxiliary function address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4007
Userdefined auxiliary functions (aux. funct. code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4009
Asynchronous axes
External acceleration input via wordcoupled PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1002 ff.
Locking the asynchronous axes or suppressing the spindle display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 106
Setpoint input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 112
Asynchronous reciprocating axis
Reciprocating axis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6511
Auxiliary functions
Addition userdefined M functions (P numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4018
Additional userdefined M functions (M codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4019
Auxiliary function output go block" (0: All, 1: None, 2: After) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2010
Auxiliary function strobe position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2011
Auxiliary function address (: means not defined") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2001
BCD: Data format before and after decimal point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2007
Binary: Data format (8, 16, 32) bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2006
Binary: Data type (INTEGER/REAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2005
Delete data after output (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2003
M output during block search / test operation (with word coupling only) . . . . . . . . . . P 6513
Onthefly auxiliary function output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2012
Onthefly output (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2012
Output encoded in BINARY or BCD (BIN/BCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2004
Output with transfer stop (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2002
Response signal prerun and lag time in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2009
Response signal time in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2008
Subprogram for simple auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4022
T output during block search / test operation (with word coupling only) (YES/NO) . . . P 6512
Userdefined auxiliary functions (aux. funct. code) (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4009
Userdefined auxiliary functions (P numbers) (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4008
Userdefined auxiliary function address (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4007
Axes, definition
Axes (system axes), assignment to SERVOi input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9502
Axes, number of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 101
Axis addresses . . P 102, P 122
Axis coupling (synchronous) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 124
Axis coupling via interface, tolerance in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1023
Axis format postdecimal position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 103
Axis type (linear, rotary, endlessrotary, analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 107
− 165 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Axis type (endlesslinear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1510, P6516 [11]

Axis processors
AP1 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9507
AP2 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9508
AP1 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9504
AP2 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9505
Axis assignment to axis processors and any inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9502
Axis processor number for digital handwheel input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9511
Handwheel pulses per P2 increment during evaluation 1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9510
Measuring system input number for digital handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9512
Number of axis processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9501
Subdivision of axis processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9503
Axis speeds
First reduction in reference point speed in m/min or 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 503
Manual feed Highspeed m/min, 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 508
Manual feed Slow m/min, 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 505
Manual feed Medium m/min, 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 506
Manual feed Fast m/min, 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 507
Manual feed Fast (G95) in mm/rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 510
Max. feedrate in m/min, 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 501
Max. path speed in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 511
Ref. point speed in m/min or 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 502
Second reduction in reference point speed in m/min or 1000 deg/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 504
B
Bit coupling
Bit coupling: Start address NC input/output. Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6008
Bit coupling: IOS block size (in bytes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6010
Block transition, feedrate jump
Max. change in feedrate in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1007
Block search
Auxiliary function output go block" (0: All, 1: None, 2: After) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2010
M function for tool change in block search / reentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4015
Subprogram for block search / reentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4014
C
Caxis
Axis number of powered tool (0 = no powered tool) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7604
Caxis parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7600
Caxis position number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7601
M code rapid switchover to turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7609
M code for changeover to milling with reference point transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7608
M code for changeover to turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7607
M code for changeover to milling with approach to reference point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7605
M code for changeover to milling without approach to reference point . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7606
Max. possible speed re. Caxis encoder and maximum operating frequencies . . . . . . P 7610
Number of spindle measuring system input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7602
Spindle analog output position number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7603
CC220 panel switchover
Display of NC identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6014
MTB/panel monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6013
Centre parameters
Axis for which length compensation active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6507
− 166 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Centre options range 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516

Centre options range 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6517
Collision control with compensation active (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6509
Display space NC block simulation negative in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6515
Display space NC block simulation positive in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6514
Format of length compensation (before and after the decimal point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6506
Format of radius compensation (before and after decimal point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6505
Limits for length compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6504
Limits for radius compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6503
Max. feed threading (m/min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6510
Normalisation of PLC compensation radius (R) length (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6508
Number of tool compensations in a table radius (D) length (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6501
Operating panel input of tool compensations (ABS/INC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6502
Circles, tolerance
End point tolerance range for circles in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9912
Radius tolerance range (G2, G3) in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9903
Collision monitoring
Colour settings, screen display
Colour ERRORS" P 3503
Colour AREA" (foreground and background) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3501
Colour MESSAGE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3504
Colour SOFTKEY" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3502
Grey scale settings (monochrome panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3600
Commutation
Commutation point in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1006
Commuting acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1005
Compensation
Backlash compensation in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1509
Compensation parameters
Compensation evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6605
Default value drift compensation in pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6607
Delay until axes in position (in P2 cycles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6602
Delay until axis comes to rest in P2 cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6601
Lag limit for loop gain factor increase (in pulses/P2 cycles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6603
Increase factor for loop gain value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6604
Maximum drift compensation value in pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6608
Contourdependent feedrate override (Look ahead)
Extension factor of BLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6805
Extension time of BLC for programmed auxiliary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6806
Minimum buffer distance in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6803
Monitoring the programmed speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6802
Path acceleration programming G106/G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6801
Strategy for automatic block cycle time feedrate reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6804
Strategy for block transition speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6801
CPL parameters
CPL strobe time for data output to interface in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4012
CPL interpreter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4021
Link list program number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4018
Machine parameter of direct call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4016
Program numbers for menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4011
− 167 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Program numbers for direct call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4016

Range of write authorisation for interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4010
Reset range at interface when control reset is activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4013
Userdefined auxiliary function address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4007
Userdefined auxiliary functions (aux. funct. code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4009
User defined auxiliary functions (P numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4008
Userdefined G functions (number of parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4003
Userdefined G functions (G code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4002
Userdefined G functions (modal) (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4004
Userdefined G functions (P numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4001
Userdefined M functions (M code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4006
Userdefined M functions (P numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4005
16 additional userdefined M functions (M code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4020
16 additional userdefined M functions (P numbers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4019
Correction
Distance to first reference point (G174) in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1503
External zero offset ON/OFF (G160/G167) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3013
Feedrate override ON/OFF (G64/G65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3009
Format of length compensation (before and after the decimal point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6506
Format of radius compensation (before and after decimal point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6505
Grid shift in pulses (electronic reference point offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1511
Limits for length compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6504
Limits for radius compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6503
Modulo value for read monitoring (E code) (999/1000) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5508
Number of tool compensations in a table radius (D) length (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6501
Operating panel input of tool compensations (ABS/INC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6502
Reference point offset in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1502
Tool table compensation ON/OFF (G145...G845/G146) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3011
CS table
CS tables for writing via interface for the position control circuit (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . P 6015
Coupled axes
Axis pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 124
D
Default status
Absolute/incremental programming (G90/G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3003
Exact positioning for G0 ON/OFF (G161/G162) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3015
Feedrate programming (G94/G95) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3005
In position programming (G61/G62) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3008
Inch/metric programming (G70/G71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3002
Interface active on switch on (PANEL/NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5507
Interpolation (G00/G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3001
Outside corner as a radius or intersection (G68/G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3010
Path slope ON/OFF (G08/G09/G108/G109/G110) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3007
Peripheral active on switch on (periph. 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5506
Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3006
Precontrol (G114/G115) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3012
SCP interface (1 = X11 (V24/RS 422), 2 = X12 (V24/20 mA)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8607
Set feed to 100 % (G63/G66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3004
− 168 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters

Define system axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 101, P 102
Direction reversal
Backlash compensation in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1509
Display
Axis format after decimal point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 103
BCD: data format before and after decimal point (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2007
Display program value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 121
Modulo display in MACHINE operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 117
Position indication via automatic and manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 119
Display, colours
Colour ERRORS" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3503
Colour AREA" (foreground and background) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3501
Colour MESSAGE" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3504
Colour SOFTKEY" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3502
Grey scale settings (monochrome panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3600
Distances
Drift
Drive offset in mm or degrees (lag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 118
Lag limit under zerospeed control in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1012
Units of distance (mic, tenmic, hundredmic, mm, cm, dm, m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9904
Waiting time for zerospeed control in sec (0=off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1013
Drift compensation
Compensation evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6605
Default value drift compensation in pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6607
Delay until axis comes to rest in P2 cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6601
Delay until axes in position (in P2 cycles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6602
Increase factor for loop gain value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6604
Maximum drift compensation value in pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6608
Drilling axis
Axis for which length compensation active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6507
Dwell time
Unit for dwell time P 9917
E
E code
Error status via interface1, 2, 4, 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Exact tapping
Acceleration pilot control evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7204
Speed pilot control evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7203
Spindle acceleration in 1000 rps2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7202
Spindle inpos. window, size in degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516, P7012
Spindle loop gain factor in (1000 degrees/min)/degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7201
F
Feedrate
Feed resolution in mm/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9906
Feed resolution in mm/rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9907
− 169 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters

Output with transfer stop (YES/NO) (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2002
Set feed to 100 % (G63/G66) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3004
Unit for feed per minute or per rev. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9905
Feedrate jump
Feedrate override, contourdependent (Look ahead)
Feedrate override, potentiometer
External feed and spindle potentiometer
(only in combination with highspeed traverse) (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2502
External feed potentiometer (input no., min %, max %, rev/range, interface). . . . . . . . . P 2503
Feed test" (min/max % value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2508
Internal feed potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2505
Potentiometer for high speed traverse combined with feedrate (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . P 2501
Format, address
Addresses A" to Z" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9001 to P 9026
Format, axis
Format, programming
Binary: Data type (INTEGER/REAL) (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2005
G
Grey scale panel, grey scale settings
Grey scale "Area" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3601
Grey scale "Softkey" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3602
Grey scale "Error" P 3603
Grey scale "Message" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3604
Grid shift
Grid shift activationP 1512
Grid shift pulseedge evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1513
H
Handwheel, analog (see parameter set 2500)
Handwheel, digital
Online compensation with handwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (P 9512)
High Speed I/O
AP1 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9504
AP2 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9505
AP1 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9507
− 170 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
AP2 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9508

Channel number for fast feed hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9911
Hirth axes
Hirth programming mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 111
Position programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 110
Positions per circle for the Hirth axis (0 = no Hirth axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 108
Run time error caused by faulty Hirth axis programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 120
I
Increment step
Variable increment step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 509
Interface, data output
CPL strobe time for data output to interface in ms (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4012
Delete data after output (YES/NO) (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2003
Multi interface data BCD or binary coded (axis data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 113
Output encoded in BINARY or BCD (BIN/BCD) (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2004
Output with transfer stop (YES/NO) (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2002
Range of write authorisation for interface (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4010
Reset range at interface when control reset is activated (CPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4013
Interface signal Machine operating mode" via PLC
Number of the interface signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Interface signal Movement ON"
Limit value of positive edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6517
Limit value of the negative edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6517
Number of the interface signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Interface signal error status via interface
Error status 1, 2, 4, 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Interface signal Position reached"
Distance to end point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6517
Number of monitored axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Number of interface signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Interface signal program exchangeability series T
Number of the 1st interface signal for programmable mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Special EIA code OFF/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
G93 (NIT, EIT) inverse time programming 0,1,10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Interface, PLC
Update time in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6006
MTM I/O panel coupling (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6007
Interpolation
Interpolation time in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9901
Interpolation, default status
Interpolation (G00/G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3001
Interface (simple DNC), data transmission
Automatic status messages to the DNC computer (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8507
Baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8501
Number of data bits per character (7 or 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8505
Parity (0 = none, 1 = even, 2 = odd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8506
Software handshake (no = hardware handshake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8503
Stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8502
Timeout period in secs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8504
Interface (LSV2DNC), data transmission
Baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8601
Maximum message length (number of characters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8604
NC priority in the event of a collision (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8605
− 171 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Parity (0 = none, 1 = even, 2 = odd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8603

SCP interface (1 = X11 (V24/RS 422), 2 = X12 (V24/20 mA)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8607
Stop bits (1, 1.5, 2)P 8602
Timeout check in sec. (max. resolution 0.5 sec.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8606
Interfaces (standard), data transmission
Baud rate (periph. 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5502
Characters in decimal ASCII code (1 = not assigned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5001
Interface active on switch on (PANEL/NC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5507
Number of the soft key text (periph. 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5501
Space between files (periph. 14) (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5505
Peripheral active on switch on (periph. 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5506
Remote diagnosis transmission rate in baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5509
Stop bits 1/1.5/2 (periph. 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5503
Timeout in s (periph. 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5504
J
Jogging
K
L
Lag
Drive offset in mm or degrees (lag). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 118
Lag with tool breakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1018, P 1019
Laser power control
Analog output for laser power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6301
Offset of output for laser power control [in %] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6302
Limit switch, software
Software limit negative in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1506
Software limit tolerance in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1507
Suppression of software limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1504
Travel limit range (normal) 1−16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6101 to P 6116
Travel limit range (fast) 1−4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6201 to P 6204
Link list program number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4018
Logbook
Initial setting of logbook number (0 = no automatic init.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9914
Look ahead (contourdependent feedrate override)
Path acceleration programming G106/G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6801
Loop gain factor
Increase factor for loop gain value (drift compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6604
− 172 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Loop gain value for position control circuit (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7014

Loop gain value’s stop increase factor (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7019
Max. loop gain in m/(min*mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1011
Min. loop gain in m/(min*mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1010
Nominal loop gain factor in (m/min)/mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1001
Speed for loop gain increase (rpm) (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7020
M
Manual feed
Max. feed threading
Max. change in feedrate
Measuring system
Feedback (YES/NO) (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7018
Distance coded measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1514 − P 1517
Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev (0 = linear scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 104
Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7022
Measuring system evaluation in pulses/incr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 105
Measuring system evaluation in pulses/increment (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7024
Measuring system input, assign to system axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9502
Measuring system direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 115
Measuring system direction (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7025
Measuring system monitoring
Ref.travel after measuring system monitoring block (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 114
Spindle encoder monitoring (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7023
MTB
MTB I/O panel coupling (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6007
Multi interface
Multi interface data BCD or binary coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 113
MSD
MSD file numbers for language switching (0 = none) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9915
O
Offset
Offset drive in mm or degrees (lag). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 118
Offset drive in rev (lag) (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7027
Operating mode, display under
Position indication via automatic and manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 119
P
Path speed
Feedrate limit via interface in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 512
Path monitoring, offset in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1018
Path monitoring, tolerance factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1019
− 173 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters

Slope point path operation in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1003
Paths
PIC
PIC 250: system data (marker 124.0 − 127.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6009
PIC 250: counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6012
PIC 250: Times in s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6011
Plane
Plane selection (G17/G18/G19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3006
PLC parameters
Bit coupling: Start address NC input/output block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6008
Bit coupling: IOS block size (in bytes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6010
MTB I/O panel coupling (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6007
PIC 250: system data (marker 124.0 − 127.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6009
PIC 250: counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6012
PIC 250: Times in s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6011
PLC mode (AUTO,PIC,BIT,WORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6001
Update time in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6006
Watchdog period in P2 cycles or task changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6002
Word coupling: segmenting of V/K and W stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6005
Word coupling: Protected range (0,4,8,12 ... 32 kB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6004
Word coupling: panel keys and potentiometers via PLC (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6003
Point, commutation
Commutation point in m/min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1006
Point, slope
Positioning accuracy
Inposition range in mm or degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1508
Spindle orientation: Inposition range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7012
Positions, software limit switch
Software limit positive in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1505
Postdecimal places
Potentiometer
External potentiometer for 2nd spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2510
External spindle potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2504
External feed potentiometer (input no., min %, max %, rev/range, interface). . . . . . . . . P 2503
Feed test" (min/max % value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2508
Internal highspeed potentiometer (only if not combined with highspeed operation) . P 2507
Internal potentiometer for 2nd spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2511
Internal spindle potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2506
Int. and ext. potentiometer coupled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2512
Internal feed potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2505
Joint potentiometer for first and second spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2509
Potentiometer for analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2513
Potentiometer for high speed traverse combined with feedrate (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . P 2501
Precontrol
Acceleration pilot control evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1017
Active precontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1020 − P 1022
− 174 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Max. acceleration precontrol evaluation. Acceleration precontrol evaluation . . . . . . . . P 1015

Max. speed precontrol evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1014
Precontrol (G114/G115) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3012
Type of fine interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9513
Speed pilot control evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1016
Probe
Decoding of tracer signal (0:, 1/2:pos./neg., 3:both edges) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9908
Program exchangeability series T
Inverse Time Programming ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Number of 1st IF signal for programmable mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Special EIA code ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6516
Programming
Absolute/incremental programming (G90/G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3003
Inch/metric programming (G70/G71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3002
Radius programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7517
Programming, format
Binary: Data type (INTEGER/REAL) (auxiliary functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2005
R
Rapid
Internal highspeed potentiometer (only if not combined with highspeed operation) . P 2507
Potentiometer for highspeed traverse combined with feedrate (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . P 2501
Reciprocating axis, asynchronous
Reduction stages, parameters for
Amplitude of superimposed speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7010
Automatic speed range selection (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7031
Constant spindle speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7006
Deleting the reference point when changing speed range (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7037
Frequency of superimposed speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7011
Idling speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7009
Loop gain value for position control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7014
M code for reduction stage bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7017
Maximum spindle speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7005
Minimum spindle speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7004
Number of reduction stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7003
Offset factor for command value in % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7032
Orientation speed for M19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7029
Polarity of the spindle servo output (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7026
Slope acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7015
Speed range change via orientation (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7034
Transmission ratio spindle/motor (sensor on motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7035
Reentry
Reference point
Distance to first reference point (G174) in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1503
Ref. travel after measuring system monitoring block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 114
Reference point position in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1501
Reference point offset in degrees (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7028
− 175 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Reference point offset in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1502

Traverse to reference point necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1510
Reference point offset, electronic (grid shift)
Grid shift activationP 1512
Grid shift pulseedge evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1513
Remote diagnosis
Remote diagnosis transmission rate in baud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5509
Resolution, measuring system
Measuring system evaluation in pulses/incr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 105
Measuring system evaluation in pulses/increment (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7024
Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev (0 = linear scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 104
Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7022
S
Second spindle
External potentiometer for 2nd spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2510
Internal potentiometer for 2nd spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2511
Joint potentiometer for first and second spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2509
Parameters, second spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7101 − P 7139
SERVO i , Typ1 osa modul − Parameter
AP1 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9504
AP2 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9505
AP3 fast inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9506
AP1 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9507
AP2 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9508
AP3 fast outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9509
Axis assignment to axis processors and any inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9502
Number of axis processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9501
Subdivision of axis processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9503
Servo output
Servo output polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 116
Servo output, assign to system axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9502
Setpoint input for asynchronous axes
Setpoint input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 112
Simulation
Display space NC block simulation negative in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6515
Display space NC block simulation positive in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6514
Slope
Maximum programmable slope acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1009
Minimum programmable slope acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1008
Slope acceleration in m/s2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1002
Slope acceleration (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7015
Software limit switch
Software limit positive in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1505
Software limit tolerance in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1507
Suppression of software limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 1504
− 176 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Speed jump
Speeds
Spindle display
Spindle parameters
Amplitude of superimposed speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7010
Automatic speed range selection (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7031
Constant spindle speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7006
Feedback (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7018
Frequency of superimposed speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7011
Idling speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7009
Loop gain value for position control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7014
Loop gain value’s stop increase factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7019
M code for reduction stage bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7017
Manual spindle speed in rpm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7030
Transmission ratio spindle/motor (sensor on motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7035
Maximum deviation of the spindle speed in % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7016
Maximum spindle speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7005
Maximum value for spindle positioning in degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7033
Measuring system direction (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7022
Measuring system evaluation in pulses/increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7024
Measuring system resolution in pulses/rev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7022
Minimum spindle speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7004
Number of reduction stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7003
Offset drive in rev (lag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7027
Offset factor for command value in % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7032
Orientation speed for M19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7029
Polarity of comm. voltage with M3 (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7007
Polarity of comm. voltage with M4 (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7008
Polarity of the spindle servo output (POSITIVE/NEGATIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7026
Reference point offset in degrees (spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7028
Search speed in rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7036
Second spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7100
Slope acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7015
Speed at the moment the position servo loop is closed (− 1 = no position servo control) P 7002
Speed at which spindle stop" is output (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7021
Speed for loop gain increase (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7020
Speed range change via orientation (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7034
Spindle axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7001
Spindle encoder monitoring (YES/NO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7023
Spindle orientation: Inposition range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7012
Spindle orientation: M code (0 = not defined) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7013
− 177 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Spindle potentiometer
External spindle potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2504
Internal spindle potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 2506
Suppression table
Characters in decimal ASCII code (−1 = not assigned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5001
System axes, assign to SERVOi inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9502
T
Tangential tool control
Lowering time in scanning cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6404
Maximum angle of rotation in degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6402
Number of the tool axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6401
Raising time in scanning cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6403
Test mode
Time monitoring
SCP timeout in ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9913
Timeout check in sec. (max. resolution 0.5 sec) (LSV2DNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8606
Timeout in s (periph. 1−4) (standard interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 5504
Timeout period in secs. (simple DNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 8504
Watchdog (P1: in task changes, P2: in ms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 9902
Watchdog period in P2 cycles or task changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6002
Tool
Tool control, tangential
Lowering time in scanning cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6404
Maximum angle of rotation in degrees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6402
Number of the tool axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6401
Raising time in scanning cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6403
Traverse path
Turning machine
Graphics work file, size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7508
Max. feed threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7509
NC block simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7507
Number of compensation sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7501, P 7510
Tool nose radius compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7507
Wear input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7504
Wear value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7505
Word format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 7502, P 7503
W
Word coupling
Word coupling: Protected range (0,4,8,12 ... 32 kB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6004
Word coupling: segmenting of V/K and W stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 6005
Workpiece zero shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 3014
− 178 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
Z
Zero shift
Input via panel − absolute or incremental (ABS/INC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4503
Number of zero shift sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4501
Zero offset limiting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P 4502
Zerospeed control
− 179 −
Typ1 osa / CC 220
Glossary
Machine parameters
− 180 −
1070 073 309-106 (96.06) GB · HB NC · AT/VSP · Printed in Germany

Machine Parameters CC 220

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Parameters CC 220

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Machine Parameters CC 220

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Typ1 osa / CC 220

1070 073 309-106 (96.06) GB

Z4 GA and D4 NA (Type1 osa)

Z25 FO and D25 NJ (CC 220)

Reg. Nr. 16149-03

by Robert Bosch GmbH,

Discretionary charge 20.– DM

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety − 1

6. Index of all parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

This manual is intended for technically qualified personnel. The machine

Please note that we offer a comprehensive training program. An overview of

You should nevertheless be wary of residual risks!

Pictographs and symbol explanations

The following warnings and instructions can be attached to hardware modules to

’ Electrostatically sensitive devices!

’ Remove plug before opening!

’ Bolts only for PE conductor connection!

’ Only for cable screen connection!

Hierarchical warning instructions are used in this manual. The warning

The warning instructions are classed hierarchically in the following order:

The symbol IMPORTANT is used in addition to the hierarchy of warning

‘ controlling feed drives, spindles and auxiliary axes in a machine tool in

Any other use is against regulations!

Please note our comprehensive training programme. An overview of courses may

Retrofittings and changes by the operator

‘ Changing the machine parameter data

‘ Outputting the machine parameter data to a storage medium

4.1 Running the machine parameters program

This operating mode is selected by pressing

The following display appears onscreen:

NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

ERROR CONDITION ON STATUS

DIAGNOSTIC DIAGNOSTIC RESET SERVICE

NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

NUMBER NAME OF PROGRAM LENGTH ACCESS

MEMORY USED BY DIAGNOSTIC 4156 OTHERS: 72042

LOAD OUTPUT START DELETE

By pressing the softkey

NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

NUMBER NAME OF PROGRAM LENGTH ACCESS

MEMORY USED BY SYSTEM 28219 OTHERS: 34690

MACHINE PARAMETERS PROGRAM

EDIT LOAD TRANSFER OUTPUT MANAGE

If on selecting DIAGNOSTIC operating mode, the softkey line

DIAGNOSTIC DIAGNOSTIC RESET SERVICE

is displayed, including the MPP" softkey, pressing the softkey

4.2 Editing (modifying)

NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

NUMBER NAME OF PROGRAM LENGTH ACCESS

MEMORY USED BY SYSTEM 4900 OTHERS: 34690

MACHINE PARAMETERS PROGRAM

EDIT LOAD TRANSFER OUTPUT MANAGE

NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

NUMBER NAME OF PROGRAM LENGTH ACCESS

MEMORY USED BY SYSTEM 4900 OTHERS: 58009

MACHINE PARAMETERS PROGRAM

WITH TEXT WITHOUT TEXT

NO BF0 NC0 DIAGNOSTIC

LOAD, SELECT DEVICES, INTERFACE

LOAD, SELECT DEVICES, INTERFACE